JP7076813B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the gaming machine that executes the game effect according to the result of the determination. Is common.

In such a gaming machine, there is also known to perform an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-033816

However, a gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in gaming is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation unit (effect button 17 (button vibration motor)) capable of vibrating in a predetermined mode. Staging lever 24 (lever vibration motor ) ) and acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). The main control board 110), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (main control board 110), and a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. A staging control means (staging control board 130) to be executed is provided, and the staging control means can be controlled into a first staging mode (staging modes A to C) and a second staging mode (staging modes D to G). Therefore, during the execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a change effect (vibration effect ) that changes the operation unit from a non-vibration state to a vibration state without performing an operation valid period and an operation promotion display . The degree of expectation that the special game is executed when the change effect is executed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the change effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Change effect (pre-reading vibration effect, vibration effect at step-up notice effect, etc.) and second change effect (vibration effect when symbols are aligned, vibration when C symbols are aligned) executed at different timings from the first change effect. (Effect, etc.), and the vibration mode in the first change effect (look-ahead vibration effect: weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 3 seconds, step-up notice effect: weak vibration for 1 second) and the second. It is possible to make the vibration mode (when the C symbols are aligned: strong vibration for 1 second, when the symbols are aligned: strong vibration for 4 seconds) different from the vibration mode in the change effect, and the first change effect is performed during the execution of the game effect. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second change effect and the second change effect so that the effect periods do not overlap .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the demo waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system staging process in a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for an abnormality. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice type determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice type determination table for the effect mode D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice effect scenario determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect execution process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the lamp change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the big hit notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice decision table before reach. It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the development production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case that there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after the power supply restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power-on-time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the deformation example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case that there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after the power supply restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on-time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) cannot be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the operation part was operated while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect which the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the staging example in which a variable staging is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold is increased immediately after decrease. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example in which the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the look-ahead vibration effect and the line notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the line notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the pseudo continuous effect is executed before the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the pseudo continuous effect is executed after the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the development effect is executed and SP reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the development effect is executed and SPSP reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in the case where the cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 in the case where the determination effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect, and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determination effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 in the case where the determined effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 2 in the case where the determination effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production example when the probability change mission production is executed during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. It is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an effect example 1 in various timings of a timing chart 2. It is a production example 2 in various timings of a timing chart 2. It is a timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an effect example 1 in various timings of a timing chart 3. It is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. It is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. It is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of the production at various timings of the timing chart 5. 6 is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of the production at various timings of the timing chart 7. It is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of the production at various timings of the timing chart 8. This is a modification 1 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 2 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 3 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 when the command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the gaming board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction. It is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction. It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized via the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), a game ball paid out from a payout device 100 described later, and the like are used. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls of the above, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11, and the launch operation of the game balls. Is provided with a launching operation device 13 for performing the above.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side on the left and right.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 17 emits effect by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is possible. Further, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is a part of the button drive device 17b, makes it possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the effect position located above. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin. Further, the effect operation can be performed by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor which is a part of the button drive device 17b, and the effect is produced even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. The button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower plate 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a 15a (see FIG. 2) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing handles 15 for emitting light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the 4 to the closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 has a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and an ascending member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is opened. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage portion 42 that rolls the game ball introduced inside the frame 40 and causes it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and the general winning openings 43 are provided. When a winning (winning) game ball is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are added as prize balls from the payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning (winning) game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, the game ball is from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 detects a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning) and a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

A winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from a panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LED or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit judgment of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided, which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (Fig.). 2), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variablely) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second start port detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39 and flows down are provided. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. The gaming ball that has flowed down the out-ball flow path and is detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the gaming machine 1 from the ejection port on the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, a second special symbol hold display 64, as well as. The normal symbol hold display 65, the round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when the big hit game (special game) described later is executed, and the big hit game (special game) or the short-time game state. Right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is affixed in the vicinity of the main information display device 59 (not shown). On the winning probability display sticker, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed. The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol is for jackpot determination by acquiring a random value for jackpot determination (first special symbol determination information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is made, the first special symbol display 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot determination of the second special symbol is for jackpot determination by acquiring a random value for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is made, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot determination.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means that the jackpot game (special game) is executed in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to do so. The "big hit game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

In the winning lottery of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit judgment random value is acquired, and the acquired hit judgment random value is compared with the hit judgment value to be "win". Corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variation display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot determination of the first special symbol (the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. In addition, although the first hold storage is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The jackpot determination of the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal figure hold storage), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold storage. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved storages for the normal figure is four, the number may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot judgment of a special symbol is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it is turned off and "-" is displayed. It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 2 jackpot games, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is right to urge to launch a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a big hit state (special game state) and a time-saving game state. It is for displaying the hitting display, and the LED lights up during the big hit state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the mode shifts to, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As described above, since the state confirmation indicator 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is provided. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is possible to recognize which setting is set. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 is lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it can also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of any of the display devices of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right inside the game area 5a, a sub first fluctuation display 81, a sub second fluctuation display 82, a sub first hold display 83, a sub second hold display 84, and a sub normal figure fluctuation display 85. , A sub-information display device 80 including a sub-normal figure holding display 86 and a sub-right-handed display 87 for urging a game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) is provided. The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display device such as the status confirmation display device 68 described above, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation indicator 82 displays the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. It is for (notifying), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, a big hit. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 blink and stop during the fluctuation display of the special symbol so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed can be grasped. When it is displayed, it may be turned on or off.

The sub first hold display 83 is for displaying the number of first hold storages (hold number), and the sub second hold display 84 displays the number of second hold storages (hold number). This is for the purpose, and each is composed of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number (hold number) of the normal figure hold storage, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and the effect symbol executed during the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a.

The display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area, and is displayed in each variable display area. By scrolling the staging symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the staging symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. Further, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area can be used as a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

The staging symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are, for example, composed of symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and are specially executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization) with the variation display of the symbol. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (oscillated display) before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

The "temporary stop display" means that the staging symbol 70a sways slightly or the staging symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the staging symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not) to say the aspect.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same staging symbols such as "777" or a combination of staging symbols having regularity such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation that the jackpot (special game) will be executed (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") has been increased. There is.

Here, the "reach effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for a player in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side region and the right side region. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

In addition, there are six types of reach effects in this embodiment: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", "SPSP" 7 "reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect". be.

The "normal reach effect" is a reach state in which two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area while the background image before reach is displayed. It is a reach production performed in the state of forming.

The "SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a in the state where the reach state is formed is reduced and displayed in the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (high expectation of a big hit). ) It is a reach production where the production is performed.

The "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect, and the effect effect (highly expected to be a big hit) is performed as compared with the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot determination is won.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning a big hit related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

Further, in the lower part of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first number corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages in the normal gaming state. The first hold icon display area 70B for displaying the hold icon and the second hold icon of the number corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) which is the current number of second hold storages in the specific game state are displayed. 2nd hold icon display area 70D for displaying the icon display corresponding to (related) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. Region 70C is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special figure hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 First, the first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 showing the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special figure hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 Second, the second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TI is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TI disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

Further, on the left side of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), a first reserved number indicating the current number of first special figure reserved numbers (U1) in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state is displayed. 1st special figure holding number display area 70E for the purpose and 2nd special figure holding for displaying the 2nd holding number indicating the current number of the 2nd special figure holding number (U2) in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. In the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the effect position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and the production position located in the lower left due to the driving force of the second movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving diagonally in the vertical direction, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their production positions partially overlap with each other, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 basically operate at the same time. By not doing so, they do not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, at the stage where one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the effect position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 100 for paying out a game ball based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), an island facility, or the like. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect that controls the effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine. A game information output terminal plate 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting a game signal) is provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device 130A from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered with the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various types of lighting. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 2) for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the device (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) is provided.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (game). (Different advantages) RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that enable the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base value described later), and is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays having a decimal point DP side by side. There is. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two seven-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of set values and performance information is configured.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main RAM 110c as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the staging control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, and the like. Is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and games notified to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and causes the payout device 100. It controls or sends a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

An open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a controls the predetermined number of play balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of paying out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (sub-control means) that controls the effect (performed by the game machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m provided with a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control unit 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. In response to the input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, control is performed to cause various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (data and commands). Output).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Or, control is performed so that the voice output device 9 outputs a predetermined voice.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. For receiving voice control commands from the image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, and the control control unit 141. Based on this, it includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) that controls the voice output device 9, and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process and an audio output device for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). And, it has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. Drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second. It is output to the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (displaying an image) is performed 60 times per second.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, and receives the data from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, control is performed for a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices to perform a predetermined effect (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a button drive device 17b, a panel lighting device 76, and a sub information display device 80 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control unit, and are transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various effect data (including commands) generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 can be performed, and the button drive device 17b and the button drive device 17b can be used. It controls the drive of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, staging control). It is supplied to the substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, staging control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as states relating to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and "non-time saving state" and "non-time saving state" as states relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47. It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is "low probability state" and "non-time saving state"
(2) Low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) that is both "low probability state" and "time saving state"
(3) High-probability time-saving game state (probability variation game state) that is both "high probability state" and "time-saving state"

The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state". In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 or the first when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is "1". 2 In the jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting port 47, the winning probability of the jackpot is set as low as about 1/300. On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is set as high as about 1/60. Say the game status.

Specifically, there are four types of set values, "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The jackpot winning probability in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/295, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state is about. When it becomes 1/59 and the set value is "3", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/290, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is ". In the case of "4", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state occurs after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "probability change jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving state" means the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. It is a gaming state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set is short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is ". It refers to a gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving state". Further, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127/128. Is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously advance the game in a state in which it is difficult to consume the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". Has been done. However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of ordinary symbols may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the big hit determination, the small hit that is less advantageous to the advantager than the big hit is not won, but for example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/100. May be good. In this case, it is preferable that the small hit probabilities are the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability). You may do it.

Further, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be the same in all the set values (1 to 4), for example, two or three set values (1 and). 2, 1 to 3 etc.) may have the same probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability state and / or the high probability state. Further, the set value of the present embodiment is 4 steps from 1 to 4, but the setting value is not limited to 4 steps, and may be more or less than 4 steps.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 3A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 3B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 3A to 3B, the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (big hit, loss). It is attached, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 3A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 3B, and refers to the current set value, the probability state, and the jackpot. Based on the judgment random value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 3A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The judgment random value is determined to be a "big hit". Then, the random value for jackpot determination other than the jackpot determination is determined to be "missing".

The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored. The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area or the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , The jackpot determination will be made using the shifted special figure determination information.

Further, the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is reserved. The icon is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the reservation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is displayed. The second hold icon is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 4A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 4B is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 4A to 4B, the special symbol determination table corresponds to the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result. The stop special figure data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated with each other.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols for executing the first jackpot game, and the special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols for executing the second jackpot game. , The special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol that executes the third jackpot game.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 6 times. In the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game is completed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50. Further, after the end of the first big hit game, the low probability non-time saving game state (time saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Further, after the end of the second big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

In the "third big hit game", a round game in which the second big winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to four times. Further, after the end of the third big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 4A to 4B, and the type of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the type of the special symbol is based on the random value for determining the special symbol. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the type of the jackpot special symbol and the type of the lost special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without complicating the game.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various lost symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 5A is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 5B is a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination are used. The random number value, the first special figure holding number (U1) or the second special figure holding number (U2), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. And the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5, and refers to a jackpot determination result, a special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), a random value for reach determination, a first special figure hold number (U1), or a first. 2 The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved special figures (U2) and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. It has become like.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is determined according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed. , Means to stop without reaching.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. , The mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach production.

Further, the "SP reach" and the "special SP reach" are super reach productions in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach production, and the development production is executed from the normal reach production, and then executed. For example, the two effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. .. In addition, "special SP reach" is performed with a special effect than "SP reach".

Further, the "SPSP reach" and the "SPSP" 7 "reach" are special reach productions in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the super reach, and are executed after the normal reach production or the super reach production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used. It is designed to produce a more special reach than "SP Reach". In "SPSP reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP" 7 "reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol "7".

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach production. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. And "SPSP" 7 "reach", a special reach production (reach production with a big hit confirmed) is performed.

The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the types of special figure fluctuation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that when the number of reserved first special figures increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, shortened variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, the shortened fluctuation is not determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting left than when hitting right in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that even if the number of reserved first special figures increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened. While the fluctuation is not determined, when the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is that the (long) shortened variation is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variation display of the special symbol when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 6A is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. FIG. 6B is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the pre-judgment table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are displayed. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 6, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S2, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130 wait for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S7 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S8 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S9 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, every time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is set. When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and a process for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, the staging control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step S7 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for games), the process is transferred to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for games is abnormal), the process is started. Assuming that the control state before the power is cut off cannot be restored normally, the process is transferred to step S12.

When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the staging control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

It should be noted that the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but it may be canceled even when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and is an unrecoverable error screen on the image display devices 70 and 71 ("Unrecoverable error. Change settings." Please go. " It is to output an unrecoverable error sound (“Unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “directing device”.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S13 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S14 as if the RWM clear operation is executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state), and the payout control board 120 and It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on on the image display devices 70 and 71. ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area from the audio output device 9 is displayed. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that it has been initialized for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, and the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the staging control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command performs a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, a screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and a predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are being confirmed. All lights are turned on by color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the staging control board 130 will perform processing for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 are notified of the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The design "135") can be displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can be fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the sound output device 9 can be displayed. It is to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power recovery notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a inputs other commands (a first special figure hold number (U1), a special figure hold number designation command indicating a second special figure hold number (U2), and a normal figure hold number (G). A command for specifying the number of reserved numbers to be shown) is transmitted to the staging control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. It will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the staging control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the staging control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S25, the jackpot determination is performed. The initial value random value update process for updating the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs processing for clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, sets the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (abnormality determination data) of (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, the backup flag is saved. Performs a process to prohibit RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so fraudulent activities can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, which causes the gaming machine to perform unexpected movements, which is annoying to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the lighting device 76 for the panel, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Further, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. Then, the process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game status, but after the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent, the current game status is sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the setting change is performed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the setting change is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a determines the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, an out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a is used to determine the number of special figure reservations (big hit determination, etc.), control the display of special symbols, control the opening / closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), control the gaming state, and the like. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal drawing control process for performing a normal figure storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), a display control of a normal symbol, an opening / closing control of a second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, it controls to perform the magnetic anomaly error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator Performs data creation processing for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a has port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Display output processing to output signals such as special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and during the normal gaming state. Performs processing for counting the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state. ..

The total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and outs is counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine is used. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. Update and update (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the game is currently a big hit game (special game). Is determined. If you are currently playing a big hit, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that won the big winning opening 50 and update (C ← C + 1) to get the big winning opening. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (winning) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, an error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the staging control board 130, and the staging control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (specify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 10 to be described later is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal map reservations, which is the number of normal symbol hold storages stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of holdings of the normal figure is less than 4, "1" is added to the number of holdings of the normal figure to update it, and the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol determination, normal figure fluctuation pattern) is updated. (Random value for determination) is acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal figure judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (the game ball wins the first start port 45). When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value) are acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special feature. The first special figure hold number designation command corresponding to the figure hold number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the command for designating the number of reserved first special figures is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved first special figures.

The main CPU 110a stores the special symbol determination information acquired in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit is searched. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the non-time saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving game state, the process is transferred to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving game state, the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130, and the staging control board 130 is executed before or before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that executes a predetermined advance notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. The look-ahead notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is done using.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first start port 45, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), The first special figure hold number designation command, the first pre-determination process, and the first look-ahead designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second start port 47, the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold storage, respectively. It may be read as the second special figure hold number (U2), the second special figure hold number designation command, the second pre-determination process, and the second look-ahead designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the change display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the hold storage (special figure judgment information), the change time is set, and the start command (special). Performs processing for transmitting the symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) to the effect control board 130, processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and the like. The special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for this purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the change display of the special symbol is stopped and the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set according to the passage of the change time, and the stop command (special figure stop command) is directed and controlled. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process for transmitting to the board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is lost due to the passage of the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol, and the big hit special symbol is a big hit. The opening time of the game is set, and the processing for transmitting the opening designation command to the effect control board 130 and the special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the big hit is based on the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and sending the command for specifying the number of rounds to the staging control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Execution of the jackpot game process (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting the ending designation command to the staging control board 130, the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", and the like. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for ending the jackpot game with the passage of the ending time and the gaming state after the jackpot end (low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state, high probability number of times, time saving number of times) ), The special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0", and the big hit game end processing (step S350) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S310-1 whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S310-4. To move.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the second special figure reservation number (U2) in step S310-3, and corresponds to the subtracted second special figure hold number (U2) in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information hold storage area. The data stored in the storage unit is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the first special figure hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S319-1. To move.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the first special figure reservation number (U1) in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the subtracted first special figure reservation number (U1). The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-8. The shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, along with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first special figure hold number (U1) and the second special figure hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set in the specified area of. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information hold storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information hold storage area and shifted (the second special figure hold number is the second). Although it was decided to subtract the number of special figures on hold in order of priority, the first special figure determination information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area was set in the order in which the game balls entered the starting port. It may be shifted (the number of reserved first special figures and the number of reserved second special figures are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. (The number of reserved first special figures may be deducted in preference to the number of reserved second special figures).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special figure judgment information (random value for big hit judgment) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, is collated with the big hit judgment table shown in FIG. Judge whether or not. Further, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4, and the special symbol is stopped. Performs the process of determining the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is obtained. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will display the variation of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is issued for directing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Main processing of the staging control unit)
Next, the main process of the staging control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the staging control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the staging control unit)
A timer interrupt process of the staging control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the staging control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change / confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is made. The process for executing the change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, the process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output sound. The power-on sound is output from the device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power recovery notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display the power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output sound. A power recovery sound is output from the device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a customer waiting state specification command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and performing a customer waiting demo effect after a predetermined time has elapsed if the command has been received is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or by sound. A customer waiting demo sound is output from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special figure hold number specification command or a normal figure hold number specification command is received by referring to the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored (understood) in the sub RAM 130c. ) Performs processing to update the number of 1st special figure hold, 2nd special figure hold number, normal figure hold number, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead system effect processing in step E500. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead designation command or a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the icon changes as a look-ahead system effect. Performs processing related to staging, continuous notice staging, and lamp change staging. The details of the look-ahead staging process will be described later.

The "icon change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the hold icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect" and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "ramp change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects.

The sub CPU 130a performs the special figure special electric effect processing in step E600. Specifically, the special symbol specification command, the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the special figure stop specification command, the jackpot opening specification command, the round number specification command, and the jackpot ending specification command are referred to with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if it is received, the process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs the normal-figure-general-purpose effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to receive a normal symbol specification command, a normal figure fluctuation pattern specification command, a normal figure stop specification command, a hit opening specification command, a hit ending specification command, and the like. It is determined whether or not it is present, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E800. Specifically, the update of the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP / SPSP reach effect that results in loss, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, multiple effect modes are displayed. Perform processing to update to any of the modes.

The "effect mode" includes the effect modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving game state) and the effect modes D to E set in the probability variation game state (high probability time saving game state). An effect mode F that is set in a gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) is provided. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.), the effect mode initially set is always the effect mode A, and the power supply is used. The effect mode that is set first when controlled to the probabilistic gaming state when ON is always the effect mode D, and the effect mode that is set first when controlled to the time-saving gaming state when the power is turned ON. Is always in the production mode F.

Further, in the effect modes A to C, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number (identification character) + a character corresponding to the number (decorative part) + a number and a symbol effect image (decorative part) for decorating the background of the character. The numbers and character designs are different between the production modes. In the effect modes D to G, the effect symbol 70a is composed of only numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common between the effect modes. Further, in the effect modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each effect mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating operation).

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, it performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Customer waiting production processing of the production control unit)
A customer waiting effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state specification command has not been received, the process is transferred to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state specification command has been received, in step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demo production. Select the demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the waiting time of. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 16, one demo waiting time is determined from a plurality of demo waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is waiting. Specifically, it is determined whether the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not waiting, the customer waiting effect processing is terminated as if the customer waiting demo effect is not executed. If the demo is waiting, the demo wait timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. ..

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E300-6 whether or not the demo standby timer = 0. If the demo wait timer is not 0, the customer wait effect process is terminated assuming that the customer wait demo effect is not executed yet, and if the demo wait timer = 0, the customer wait demo effect is produced in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect processing this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting demo effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect that appeals to the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect.

In FIG. 16, the demo waiting time determination table is associated with a gaming state, a current state, and a selected demo waiting time. Four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state. Is set.

The first feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo waiting time after the still display, the demo waiting time after the variable display of the staging symbol ends (variable time elapses) and the staging symbol is statically displayed, and the staging symbol after the customer waiting demo staging ends. There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed still. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the current state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the variation display of the effect symbol ends (varies) rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the staging pattern is statically displayed after (time has passed) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the power is restored rather than the demo standby time after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed. Immediately after that, the demo waiting time after the staging pattern is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the effect is displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is displayed still is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo effect is completed is the shortest. Therefore, the appealing power to the game to the player can be effectively enhanced, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that each demo waiting time in a specific gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability short-time gaming state) is more than each demo waiting time in the normal gaming state. The longer point is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading effect processing of the effect control unit)
A look-ahead system effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, an effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. The details of the continuous advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect execution process for executing the continuous advance notice effect determined to be executed in the continuous advance notice effect determination process. The details of the continuous advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (turning on the winning opening lamp NR so that the light emitting mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and this time. End the look-ahead effect processing. The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, it is in the normal gaming state, and the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the second starting port 47. In some cases, a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) may be provided.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-5. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 19) for determining the final display mode of the icon. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, and is plurality based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the icon final display modes of.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-8 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of icons are based on the final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Determine one change scenario from the change scenarios of.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. Set the display command in the transmission buffer and end the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , A predetermined effect sound will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined effect sound (first winning sound) may be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when an icon is generated for each type is described.

In the final display mode of the icon, a white icon as a normal icon, a blue icon as a special icon suggesting that a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red icon, and a rainbow icon are set. Has been done.

The expectation of winning a big hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of (white icon <) blue icon <red icon <rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms that it will be a big hit.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generation notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generation notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the first generation notification sound is output. , When the third generation notification sound is output and the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generation notification sound is set to be output.

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach where the scheduled fluctuation pattern is not reach. It is supposed to be done.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, when a big hit occurs, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. ..

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the white icon is generated, the blue icon, the red icon, and the white icon are generated. There may be two types, a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or the notification sound is not output when the white icon is generated, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to any mode. You may. Further, for the rainbow icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the display mode of the icon change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach effect) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide the scenario to let you do. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a is on hold to change (update) the display mode in the current variation effect. Determine if there is an icon. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 22) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 22, among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon may change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) may be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process is moved to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. The process is transferred to step E520-11 assuming that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the hour command (special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) cannot be received normally.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-9, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. Select the change pattern determination table (see FIG. 23) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

At the time of abnormality, the sub CPU 130a determines in step E520-11 whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to power recovery or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 24) for. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, referring to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormal time, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command this time and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final icon display mode is also determined.

In step E520-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a change pattern, the process is transferred to step E520-14, and if it is not a change pattern (it is a non-change pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing. The display mode of the icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 21, when the power is restored or a command abnormality (such as missing a look-ahead designation command) occurs, the icon change effect (the icon) is newly started in the variable effect. The change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the icon change effect not being executed due to the power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 21, the icon change effect is executed again in the variable effect newly started after the power is restored (although it was a special icon due to the hold icon change effect, it is normal due to the power restoration. Even when the icon change effect is executed for the icon that has returned to the icon), the change scenario before power restoration is performed by newly determining the effect mode of the icon change effect based on the current fluctuation pattern. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If a power recovery or command error occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the hold memory (special figure) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect in the variable effect that is newly started after the power recovery or command error occurs. The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the hold memory (special figure judgment information) before the judgment information), but the icon change effect is performed by the variable effect corresponding to the hold memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be feasible.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon, which is referred to when determining the change pattern for the hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of fluctuation) according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears, and the icon is displayed. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the action effect that acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. Is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the symbol action change pattern 01 is set.

The timing of the change effect generation of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from white icon to blue icon, change from blue icon to red icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the next higher display mode, and jackpot winning expectation Is set to 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) to change the display mode to a level two levels higher.

Although the timing for generating the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 23 (a) shows a case where the display mode of the icon is changed by one step. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 23 (b) is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1UP (for example, change from white icon to blue icon, change from blue icon to red icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the next higher display mode, and jackpot winning expectation Is set to 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) that changes the display mode to a level two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo variation is performed.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern multiple times for a jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). All within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) in order to make it appear as if It is a variation display of the effect symbol of a special aspect in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is limited to the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(The icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the selected icon change pattern, and the selected icon are displayed. The final display mode of the above is associated with the icon, and the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described as a reference.

The icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed, but the other icon change patterns, the change effect occurrence timing of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are described above. Since it is the same as that described in the change pattern determination table for icons, the description here is omitted.

(Continuous notice effect determination process of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 25, a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect (look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect), the process is moved to step E530-4, and if it is not the executeable period of the continuous advance notice effect. , The process is transferred to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous advance notice effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "look-ahead motion effect", a special game is executed by executing an operation effect (notice effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined mode at a timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or a plurality of variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation.

The "look-ahead effect effect" is a special game by executing an effect effect (preliminary effect) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that will be executed.

The "look-ahead vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (notice effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined mode at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

The "look-ahead zone effect" continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing an effect in the zone (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production to do.

The "executable period of the continuous advance notice effect" means that there is nothing to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is received. In some cases, it is in a normal gaming state, and when a look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize in the second starting port 47 is received, it is in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice type determination table (see FIGS. 26 and 27) according to the current effect mode, and in step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a continuously refers to the continuous advance notice type determination table. The type of advance notice (whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the type of continuous advance notice effect to be executed) is determined. The details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the sub CPU 130a is a continuous advance notice type that executes the continuous advance notice effect. When the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-16, and when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, in step E530-7, the continuous advance notice scenario determination table according to the current effect mode (FIG. 28). , See FIG. 29). The details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-8 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead operation effect is determined. When the look-ahead operation effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-10, and when the look-ahead operation effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead operation effect is referred to in step E530-9 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead effect effect is determined. If the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, the process is moved to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead effect effect is referred to in step E530-11 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-12 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead vibration effect is determined. If the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-14, and if the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead vibration effect is referred to in step E530-13 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-14 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead zone effect is determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and if the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the look-ahead zone effect is performed with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table in step E530-15. The advance notice scenario is determined, set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario (notice scenario indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed) and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and this continuous notice effect. End the decision process.

The advance notice scenario or non-notice scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous advance notice effect execution process of step E540 described above, and the process for executing the continuous advance notice effect or the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Processing will be performed to prevent it.

As described above, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, the look-ahead operation effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead operation effect is not executed. The second movable member 74 operates (operates) when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, since the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the normal game state, the second is in the normal game state. It is easier to execute the vibration effect when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, since the look-ahead operation effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, the first The second movable member 74 is more likely to operate (operate) when the second special symbol variation display (variation effect) is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, since the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, the first It is easier to execute the vibration effect when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice type determination table referred to for determining a continuous advance notice type in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 27 is a diagram showing effect modes D to G (specific game state). ) Is a diagram showing a continuous notice effect determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the continuous advance notice type determination table is associated with a look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), a selection rate (%) for each continuous advance notice type, and a selected continuous advance notice type. , Continuous notice type is "non-execution" that does not execute continuous notice effect, "look-ahead operation effect" that one of multiple types of continuous advance notice effect is executed, "look-ahead effect effect", "look-ahead vibration effect" , "Look-ahead zone effect", "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect", and "look-ahead operation effect & look-ahead zone effect" in which two of a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects are executed are provided.

For example, when the look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined in 85%, "look-ahead effect effect" is determined in 5%, and so on. 4% determines "look-ahead motion effect", 3% determines "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% determines "look-ahead zone effect", and 1% determines "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect". Will be done.

(Continuous notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 29 shows a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure.

The continuous advance notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of reserved special symbols, the look-ahead specification command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each advance notice scenario, and the selected advance notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (4 fluctuations before, 3 fluctuations before, 2 fluctuations before, 1 fluctuation before), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "weak notice" means that the effect mode differs depending on the continuous advance type, and in the case of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak operation that emits light in blue and operates, and a weak operation sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect effect, the blue effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and the blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button is displayed. The vibrator for vibrating 17 vibrates weakly for only one second, and the effect button 17 blinks white. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. Is to be done.

The "strong notice" means that the effect mode differs depending on the continuous advance notice type, and in the case of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong operation that emits light in red and operates, and a strong operation sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect effect, the red effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and the red effect sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button is displayed. The vibrator for vibrating 17 vibrates strongly for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 blinks in red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. Is output.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice or a strong notice is not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), or a scenario during the advance change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set in the scenario.

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that when a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effect is executed rather than when one type of continuous advance notice effect is executed. However, there is a point that the expectation of big hits is high. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the second feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is easy to execute the continuous advance notice effect (the execution rate is high), that is, the jackpot expectation when the continuous advance notice effect is executed is low. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of making the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect different between the effect modes A to C and the effect modes D to G, for example, the effect mode B executes the continuous advance notice effect more than the effect mode A. The execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the effect modes A and C, such as making it easier to perform. For example, the effect mode E makes it easier to execute the continuous advance notice effect than the effect mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the effect modes D to G. By doing so, the jackpot expectation of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). However, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect and the look-ahead operation effect) are more likely to be executed. There are points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead operation effect, and the look-ahead zone) The point that the production) is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead operation effect, and the look-ahead zone) The point that the production) is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) (look-ahead result). In the case where the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead operation effect and the look-ahead zone effect) Is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are more than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration effect without displaying the validity period of the effect button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easy to be executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation). Therefore, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) in which the stay period tends to be longer than in the production modes D to G (specific game state), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the look-ahead vibration effect, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved. Further, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect may be more easily executed (execution ratio is higher) in the effect modes D to G than in the effect modes A to C. Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the effect mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration effect is set between the effect modes A and C. It may be different, and if it is in a specific gaming state, the pre-reading vibration effect is easier to be executed in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E to G, so that the look-ahead vibration is performed between the effect modes D to G. The execution ratio of the effect may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is provided in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). ) Is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), and a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). In the case of the look-ahead result), it is difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in the production modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the production modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

As the ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). The point that the look-ahead operation effect is easy to be executed (the execution rate is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, in the production modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the production modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). Rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is easy to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of holdings is 2 to 4), the effect is produced. Compared to the case where the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the modes A to C (normal game state), the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is performed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). When it is executed, it is more difficult to execute the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). , In the case where the continuous notice effect over 3 times of variable effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. , SPSP reach production) is easy to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). , When the continuous notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the reach effect with a high expectation of big hit in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect (for example). , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is easy to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is the same movable member in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Although it is possible to execute the look-ahead operation effect using (the second movable member 74), the look-ahead operation effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point that the jackpot expectation when it is executed is different. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the look-ahead operation effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the deciding effect (100%) is higher than the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 used in the deciding effect described later (0%). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the pre-reading motion effect is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of operating the second movable member 74 in the strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the first movable member 73 may be operated. Even in this case, when the look-ahead operation effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is higher than the ratio of operating the first movable member 73. , It is preferable that the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 is higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the look-ahead vibration effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio of the effect button 17 to the normal state (0%) is higher than the ratio of the effect button 17 to the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity that the effect button 17 is in the projecting state (it is in the projecting state only in the determined effect described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated as a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the protruding state is higher than the ratio. , It is better to set the ratio to the normal state to be higher.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 70a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect (weak movement of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of a blue effect image around the effect symbol 70a) are executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second of the effect button 17), which is executed without displaying the operation promotion image, is executed than when the operation promotion image is displayed. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 70a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect (strong operation of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of a red effect image around the effect symbol 70a) are executed. There is a point that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed than in the case of the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution process of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 30, a continuous advance notice effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect execution process of this time is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect (look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and steps. In E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the notice scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E540-4, and if the notice scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. Power recovery or winning command (special) Figure The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the hold count designation command and look-ahead designation command cannot be received normally. It is assumed that a command error has occurred and processing is performed in step E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a advance notice pattern (type of continuous advance notice effect, weak advance notice, strong advance notice) to be executed in this variable effect according to the advance notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, the continuous advance notice effect command corresponding to the determined advance notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous advance notice effect according to the determined advance notice pattern is executed. When this process is completed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E540-6 whether or not to execute an alternative advance notice effect as compensation for the continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to power recovery or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the determination table (see FIG. 31) to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one substitute notice pattern from a plurality of substitute notice patterns is selected based on the current variation effect pattern and the selection rate (%) of each substitute notice pattern. decide. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative notice effect" is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and is any of a plurality of mini characters having different jackpot expectations on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by displaying.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E540-7 whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the substitute notice effect. If the alternative advance notice effect is to be executed, the process is moved to step E540-8, and if the alternative advance notice effect is not to be executed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative notice effect command corresponding to the substitute notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the alternative advance notice effect is executed.

According to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 30, if the effect scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to power restoration or command abnormality (missing look-ahead designation command, etc.), the process starts from now on. It is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without executing the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the continuous advance notice effect not being executed due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 30, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is not restarted in the variable effect started after the power is restored. In addition, it is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power interruption), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the alternative notice pattern to be selected. The production mode in the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative notice pattern includes pattern 00 in which the substitute notice effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set, and a pattern 04 in which the mini character D is displayed on the image display device is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit for a mini character is higher in the order of mini character A <mini character B <mini character C <mini character D, and mini character D is a mini character that is confirmed to be a big hit.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that the variation pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation is an alternative notice in which the substitution notice effect is executed, rather than the fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. The point that the pattern is easy to determine is mentioned. Therefore, if there is a high possibility that the continuous advance notice effect was executed before the power was restored or the command abnormality occurred, the alternative advance notice effect will be executed, and the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect will be reduced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect. It is easier to determine the alternative notice pattern in which the alternative notice effect is executed than in the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice effect prior to the hold is executed. Therefore, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, in the variable effect executed after the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice effect (line notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, etc.) described later. , The alternative notice effect may not be executed by increasing the execution probability of the jackpot advance notice effect more than usual.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable that the jackpot notice effect is easier to execute than when the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not been set is executed. By doing so, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub RAM 130c. In step E550-6, it is assumed that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the power recovery or winning command (command for specifying the number of special figure hold, command for pre-reading) that is cleared cannot be received normally. Move the process.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process is moved to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the lamp change effect execution process this time is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp change effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp change effect is produced. End the execution process.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E550-6 whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process is transferred to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and performs the lamp change effect execution process this time. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 32, the lamp change mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR is changed in response to the icon change in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform production. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the effect of changing the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 32, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power supply is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to do or perform an alternative notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power supply is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect started after the power supply is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the prior fluctuation to the change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do so.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit)
The variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process is executed in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step E610-1, and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (FIGS. 34 and 35) according to the current effect mode in step E610-2. .. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns with reference to the selected variation effect pattern determination table, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C referred to for determining a variation effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode D to G (specific game state) which is referred for determining the variation effect pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the variation effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and a selected variation effect pattern, which is a reference. The staging configuration in each variable staging pattern is described as.

The "variation" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the normal variation display in which the reach state by the effect symbol 70a is not formed is executed.
The "shortened variation" indicates that the shortened variation display is executed, which is shorter than the normal variation display and does not form a reach state.
The “L fluctuation” indicates that a long fluctuation display in which the reach state is not formed longer than the normal fluctuation display is executed.

The "pseudo-failure" is a pseudo-continuous effect after performing an effect of inciting whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a and then re-variating it during one special symbol variation display is performed. It is shown that the pseudo-continuous failure effect that results in the fact that is not performed is executed.
The "pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-successful effect that results in the pseudo-successful effect is executed after the effect of inciting whether or not the pseudo-sequential effect is executed is performed.
"(Variation-> Pseudo-success) x 2" is an effect in which a pseudo-ream success effect is executed, which is the result of a pseudo-ream effect being performed after a fanning effect that incites whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Is set as one set, and it is shown that the production is performed in two sets.
"(Variation-> Pseudo-success) x 3" is an effect in which a pseudo-ream success effect is executed, which is the result of a pseudo-ream effect being performed after a fanning effect that incites whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Is set as one set, and it is shown that the production is performed in three sets.

The "N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
The “N“ 7 ”reach” indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of the “7”.
The “SP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
The "special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
The “SPSP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

The "SP development" indicates that the development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that full rotation reach is executed is executed.

“CI” indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects having different jackpot expectations is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
The "decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot game is executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the decision effect, the decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the decision effect, the decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.

"Loss" is to form a lost roll (a lost display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial roll described later) by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers that do not include characters, and temporarily stop. Is shown.
The "c symbol loss" is a temporary stop by forming a loss roll (a loss display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial roll described later) by the effect symbol 70a of the display mode including the character. It is shown that.
The “IC” indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
The "symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot roll (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") is formed by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers that do not include characters, and the temporary stop is performed.
The “c symbol alignment” indicates that a jackpot roll (a jackpot display mode such as “222” or “777”) is formed by the effect symbol 70a of the display mode including the character, and the temporary stop is performed.

The "re-lottery" is whether or not the staging symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot roll (big hit display mode) becomes a jackpot roll that is advantageous to the player (from an even-numbered staging symbol that is usually a jackpot) to a probable change jackpot. After inciting (whether or not it will be an odd number of production symbols and whether or not it will be the production symbol of "7" where the most advantageous jackpot game is executed), a promotion success production that will be an advantageous jackpot will be performed. It is shown that a re-lottery effect is performed, such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous big hit.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 4 seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second is executed.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C (normal game state) shown in FIG. 34, the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variation effect patterns 03 (normal reach effect) and 05 to 06 (SP reach effect) are shown. In this case, the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbol 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even-numbered effect symbol 70a is 65%, which is an odd number other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable effect patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect being performed with an even number of effect symbols 70a is 100%. ..
In the case of special symbol 02 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 60%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of reach production performed at 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 6%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The rate at which the reach effect is performed at 70a is 4%, and the rate at which the reach effect is performed at the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of the special symbol 03 (probability change jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 60%, and "7". The percentage of reach effects being performed with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 26 to 27 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even-numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable effect pattern 27 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect modes D to G (specific game state) shown in FIG. 35, in the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variation effect pattern 32 (special SP reach effect), the even-numbered effect symbols 70a The ratio of reach production is 100%.
In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probability variation jackpot), 03 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect pattern 33 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%. It has become.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 36 (normal reach effect) and 38 to 42 (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 60%. The percentage of reach effects being performed with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%. ..

In the case of special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 60%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of reach production performed at 70a is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 3%, and the odd numbered effect symbols other than "7" are used. The rate at which the reach effect is performed at 70a is 2%, and the rate at which the reach effect is performed at the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of the special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 20%, and an odd number of effects other than "7" is produced. The ratio of the reach effect to the symbol 70a is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect to the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed. The point that the effect symbol 70a is executed and returns to the display mode including the character can be mentioned. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display mode of the staging symbol 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that, in the case of a big hit, the determination success effect is executed and the pattern alignment is achieved, and the determination is successful after the symbols are aligned. There is a point that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the case of a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that in the variation effect pattern that is a big hit, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds when the effect symbols 70a that do not include the character are aligned. There is a point that a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is the strong vibration that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second when the effect symbols 70a including the character are aligned (c symbols are aligned). One point is that the production (big hit confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is the reach effect (normal reach) with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "7" (an effect symbol that becomes a probable change jackpot by becoming a jackpot). The point that the ratio of reach production with even-numbered production symbol 70a (the production design that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when an odd number of staging symbols 70a other than "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the reach effect is performed by the effect symbol 70a, which is an even number (the effect symbol that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit). The point that the ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is lower in the production symbol 70a of "7" (the production design that becomes the most advantageous probabilistic jackpot by becoming a big hit). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the effect symbol 70a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is a reach effect (normal reach) with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "7" (an effect symbol that becomes a probable change jackpot by becoming a jackpot). Rather than the ratio at which the production, SP reach production, and SPSP reach production are performed, the reach production (normal reach production, SP) is performed with the production symbol 70a of "7" (the production design that becomes the most advantageous odd-numbered jackpot by becoming a jackpot). The point that the ratio of reach production and SPSP reach production) is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the effect symbol 70a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that "7" is more important than the case where the reach effect is executed by the odd number effect symbols 70a other than the even number effect symbols 70a and "7". The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of. Therefore, the player can improve the expectation of which kind of effect symbol the reach effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the ninth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variation jackpot, the reach effect (SPSP reach effect) can be easily executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7" (the effect symbol that becomes the most advantageous probability variation jackpot by becoming a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is confirmed. However, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), a big hit is confirmed when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the reach effect is always executed in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed may be provided.

In addition, it is decided that if you temporarily stop with a loss after the cut-in effect or the decision failure effect, it will be a loss, but after the cut-in effect or the decision failure effect, it will be a big hit. May be executed.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 36, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process is a variation effect pattern determination process (variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process. Is executed after the process of determining.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E650-1, and in step E650-2, the jackpot game is executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach. The pre-reach advance notice determination table (FIG. 37) for determining the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect expected by the player is selected, and the advance notice pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach notice decision table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is to execute the dialogue advance notice effect. If the dialogue advance notice effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-4, and if the dialogue advance notice effect is not to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-6.

The "speech notice effect" generates a valid period during the variable effect (high-speed variable period), and suggests a jackpot expectation to the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the passage of the effective time. It is a kind of jackpot advance notice effect in which the voice is displayed and the voice corresponding to the voice is output from the voice output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for determining a dialogue advance notice pattern for the dialogue advance notice effect to determine the dialogue advance notice pattern, and in step E650-5, the dialogue notice pattern is determined. Set the dialogue warning effect command according to the warning pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern is executed during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is for executing the step-up advance notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-7, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-9.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the valid period of the effect button 17 during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until any of the steps (stages) is reached.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 39) for determining a step-up notice pattern for the step-up notice effect, determines the step-up notice pattern, and steps E650-. In 8, the step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 40) for determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern for pseudo-continuous effect, determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and steps E650-11. In, a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-sequential effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-sequential effect according to the pseudo-sequential effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, full rotation development effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the development effect, the process is transferred to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the development effect, the process is transferred to step E650-15.

The sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 41) for determining the development effect pattern for the development effect in step E650-13 to determine the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, the development effect is determined. Set the development effect command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the development production pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a reach effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the reach effect, the process is moved to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the reach effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect, the process is transferred to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect, the process is transferred to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining a cut-in effect pattern for the cut-in effect, determines the cut-in effect pattern, and steps E650-18. In, a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E650-22.

The sub CPU 130a selects the determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the determined effect pattern for the determined effect in step E650-20, determines the determined effect pattern, and determines the determined effect pattern in step E650-21. Set the staging command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determination effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determination effect according to the determination effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the determination effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the re-lottery effect, the process is transferred to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the re-lottery effect, the process is transferred to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern for the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-24. In, the re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect according to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing a definite effect (a big hit). If it is a variable effect pattern in which the final effect can be executed, the process is moved to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable effect pattern in which the final effect can be executed, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects a definite effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) for determining a definite effect pattern for definite effect, determines a definite effect pattern, and in step E650-27, definite effect. The confirmation effect command according to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the jackpot notice effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the confirmation effect according to the confirmation effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the finalized staging pattern determination table will be described later.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table referred to when determining a notice pattern for the pre-reach notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, the pre-reach advance notice determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each advance notice pattern, and a selected advance notice pattern.

There are three notice patterns for the pre-reach notice: "no notice" where the pre-reach notice effect is not executed, "line notice effect" where the line notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" where the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed) is no notice <line notice effect <step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is easier to be executed and the jackpot expectation is lower in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the jackpot determination result. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variable effect pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the production modes D to G (specific game state) are more lost than the production modes A to C (normal game state). The pre-notice effect (both the dialogue advance notice effect that can execute the vibration effect with the effect period of the effect button 17 and the step-up advance notice effect that can execute the vibration effect without the effect period of the effect button 17) is executed. There is a difficult point (low execution rate). Therefore, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more successful than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). However, when the variable effect pattern is a pattern for executing the normal reach effect and a pattern for executing the SP reach effect, it is difficult to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the step-up notice effect without the effect period of the effect button 17 is performed as compared with the case where the dialogue advance notice effect with the effect period of the effect button 17 is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation degree (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect is executed by the decision effect described later, etc.) is higher when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the dialogue notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree (the rate at which the vibration effect accompanying the above-mentioned pattern alignment is executed, the decision success effect described later) is higher than when the step-up notice effect is executed. The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the advance notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 38, the dialogue notice pattern determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and a selected dialogue notice pattern. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each dialogue notice pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and the effect is displayed. It is an effect of displaying a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the column of dialogue production mode means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that the normal dialogue is output by voice. Shows.
"Chance dialogue (black)" indicates that the chance dialogue that may be a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and that the chance dialogue is output by voice.
The "reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in black characters, and that the reach line is output by voice.
The "reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters, and that the reach line is output by voice.

The "heat dialogue (red)" indicates that the heat dialogue having a high possibility of executing the jackpot game is displayed in red characters and the heat dialogue is output by voice.
"Gekijou dialogue (gold)" means that the fierce heat dialogue with very high feasibility of the jackpot game is displayed in gold letters and the intense heat dialogue is output by voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 from the time when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the dialogue (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly over a second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is strong for 1 second from the start of the dialogue display (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a vibrating strong vibration effect is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each dialogue production mode is "normal dialogue" <"chance dialogue (black)" <"reach dialogue (black)" <"reach dialogue (red)" <"heat dialogue (red)" <"super heat" "Serif (Friday)" <"Confirmed dialogue (Rainbow)". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

As the first feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed. There are points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the dialogue warning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the dialogue warning effect of the intense heat dialogue, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the heat dialogue, is executed than when the dialogue warning effect of the heat dialogue is executed. In the case of It can be mentioned that the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the effect button 17 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the vibration effect executed when the dialogue (heat dialogue or higher) having a high jackpot expectation is displayed is a relatively short time. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a dialogue with a high jackpot expectation (more than a thermal dialogue) is displayed is 2 according to the jackpot expectation. There are various points. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, only the weak vibration effect or the strong vibration effect may be used, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. The vibration time of the may be lengthened.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is the same in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). However, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), or the jackpot expectation may be higher in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). May be good. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, the valid period ends and the dialogue notice effect is executed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid time. However, when the valid period ends due to the elapse of the valid time, the dialogue notice effect is performed. You may not execute it.

In addition, although it is designed to generate a valid period to execute the dialogue notice effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue notice effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect to be executed in that case is Only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining a notice pattern for the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 39, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and a selected step-up notice pattern. As a reference, the effect configuration (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern is described.

“1 → 2” in the column of the step-up effect mode indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3” indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 4” indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5” indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 5” indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order, and then the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up effect mode, the effect time of the step effect before the last step effect is 1 second, and the effect time of the last step effect is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration at" 5 "(1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. Indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation of each step-up effect mode is "1 → 2" <"1 → 2 → 3" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 4" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 5 ”.

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed, the effect button 17 does not generate an effective period. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect that vibrates the 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high jackpot expectation is displayed is a relatively short time. There are some points. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high jackpot expectation is displayed. There is only one type (weak vibration (1 second)) with a predetermined time). Therefore, in the step-up advance notice production in which it is difficult for the player to operate the effect button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of the vibration effect, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect mode and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more successful than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). , It is difficult to execute the step-up notice effect with low expectation (the execution rate is low). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more successful than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). , The point that the weak vibration effect is easy to be executed (the execution rate is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more in the step-up notice effect than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). There is a high expectation of a big hit when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect modes A to C (normal game state) of the effect buttons 17 do not have an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the vibration effect is executed may be increased. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

(Pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 40, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern are associated with the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo-continuous production ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and the effect is displayed. It is an effect of displaying a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button white" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shown, "protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

The "pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-ream effect mode means that the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped without the pseudo-ream suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream as the central effect symbol 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. It indicates that the output pseudo-continuous failure effect is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the pseudo-successful symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream, is temporarily stopped, the success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 74 operates weakly, so that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo-ream success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means from the time when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for 1 second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button white". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal" <"protruding". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern having a high expectation of big hit. A point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the fluctuation effect pattern with a high expectation of big hits and the vibration effect executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed has a relatively short time. The point is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with high jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation. There are two types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the same effect device (effect button vibration) is used in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using a motor, a second movable member 74, etc., but the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). ) Has a higher expectation of a big hit when a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) is executed using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the effect mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the effect modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is the case where the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) is executed using the second movable member 74, and the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17. There is a case where a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the pseudo-continuous production and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state during the effective period when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, but the projecting state may not be achieved.

Further, there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous success effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

In addition, although the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed by generating a valid period, even if the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed without generating the valid period. Often, the vibration effect performed in the pseudo-ream success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or a strong vibration effect for 1 second. You may do it.

Further, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are more simulated using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C may have the same effect device (effect button vibration) than the effect mode A. The jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the motor, the second movable member 74, etc. is executed may be made higher, and the effect mode D to the effect mode D may be higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation of a big hit when a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, although the motion effect using the second movable member 74 is executed in the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the motion effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the motion effect using the second movable member 74 to be higher than that of the motion effect using the first movable member 73.

(Development production pattern determination table)
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for development effect.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the development effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the development effect type to be determined for the development effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each development effect pattern, and so on. The selected development effect patterns are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each development effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"None" in the column of the effective suggestion effect indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and "Yes" means that the effective suggestion effect is executed, but the valid period does not occur after that. Indicates that the effective suggestion effect is "Yes", and "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed and then the effective period occurs.

The "valid period (long press 4 seconds)" indicates that the development effect gradually progresses by pressing and holding the effect button 17, and ends when the valid period of the development effect elapses for 4 seconds.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathered at a specific position, an opaque effect is produced. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shown, "protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development effect mode is the SP development effect that outputs the first development sound effect while deriving and displaying the SP development pattern that suggests the development to the SP reach effect as a result of the development effect. Which indicates that.
The "SPSP notification" indicates that the SPSP development effect that outputs the second development sound effect is executed while deriving and displaying the SPSP development symbol that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect. ..
"Full rotation notification" means that the full rotation development effect that outputs the third development sound effect is executed while deriving and displaying the full rotation development symbol that suggests the development to the full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect. Is shown.

"Weak movement" in the column of accessory movement means that the second movable member 74 emits blue light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (= at the end of the valid period) to perform a weak movement with a small movement width. Indicates that is executed.
"Strong movement" means that the second movable member 74 emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (= at the end of the valid period), and a strong movement effect having a large swing width is executed. Is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). Indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation of each motion effect is "weak motion" <"strong motion". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration" <"strong vibration".

The first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is the effect when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. A point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect period of the button 17 to be generated and vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is that the full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , The vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is easy to be executed (execution rate is high), and the effect button 17 is more likely than the case where the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development effect is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is that it is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. The point is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a fluctuation effect pattern with a high expectation of big hit. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is the same effect device (effect button vibration motor) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). , Second movable member 74, etc.) can be used to perform a development effect (SPSP development effect, etc.), but the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the effect mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the effect modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the development effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are developed by using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the effect (SPSP development effect, etc.) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C may have the same effect device (effect button vibration motor) than the effect mode A. , The second movable member 74, etc.) may be used to increase the expectation of a big hit when the development effect is executed, and the effect modes D to F have the same effect than the effect mode G. The jackpot expectation may be increased when the development effect using the device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

(Cut-in staging pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 42, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each cut-in effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the cut-in effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 4 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. Opaque effect button The image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

The "blue cut-in" in the column of the cut-in effect mode is the execution of the blue cut-in effect in which the cut-in image of the blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
The “green cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the green cut-in effect in which the second cut-in sound effect is output is executed. ..
The “red cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the red cut-in effect in which the third cut-in sound effect is output is executed. ..

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a weak vibration effect of weak vibration is executed for 3 seconds from the beginning.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 extends for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect that vibrates strongly is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each cut-in is "blue cut-in" <"green cut-in" <"red cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when a cut-in image having a high expectation of a big hit is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated. A point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image with high jackpot expectation is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) takes a relatively long time. There is a point that it has become. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image having a high expectation of big hit is displayed (the cut-in effect is executed) is expected to be a big hit. There are two types depending on the degree. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect includes a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, although the cut-in effect is executed by generating the valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the valid period, and the vibration effect to be executed in that case is described. Only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or only the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the selected determined effect pattern are associated with the determined effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the buttons on the 70 and collecting the button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the determined effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 5 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. Opaque effect button The image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color without the first movable member 73 operating, which suggests that the jackpot game is not executed. Indicates that is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow colors, and the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the decision success effect that suggests is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect starts (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for emitting the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect is started (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (a period longer than that when the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly).

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button red" <"protruding button rainbow". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal" <"protruding".

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that when the determination success effect is executed, the vibration effect of generating an effective period and vibrating the effect button 17 is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect button 17 vibrates over the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect generated during the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the vibration of the effect button 17 is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the motion effect using the first movable member 73 is executed in the determination effect (determination success effect), the operation effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the motion effect using the first movable member 73 to be higher than that of the motion effect using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery production pattern determination table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 44, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table contains the effect mode, the presence / absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect pattern. It is associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the re-lottery effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "normal button rainbow" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shows.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column of the re-lottery effect mode is a non-promotion symbol that does not become an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even-numbered symbol → even-numbered symbol, odd-numbered symbol other than “7” → It indicates that the odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the non-promotion sound effect is output.
The "promotion success effect" is a derivation display of a promotion symbol (for example, even symbol → odd symbol, odd symbol other than "7" → "7" symbol) which is an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect. It indicates that the promotion sound effect is output while being (temporarily stopped).

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

"Rainbow emission (4 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for making the effect button 17 emit light is 4 seconds (effect button 17) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows that it emits rainbow light over a period of time (longer than that of strong vibration).

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"normal button red" <"normal button rainbow".

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, the vibration effect of generating an effective period and vibrating the effect button 17 is executed. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the player has been promoted to a staging pattern that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating the valid period.

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a finalized effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a finalized effect.

As shown in FIG. 45, the final effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each final effect pattern, and the selected final effect pattern, for reference. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each final effect pattern is described.

"-" In the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the finalized effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the finalized effect is executed.
The "fixed sound" in the voice column indicates that a fixed sound indicating that the jackpot game is executed is output.
"Handle rainbow emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for emitting the firing handle 15 emits rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the effect symbol stops and displays). Shows that to do.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the fixed sound is output. Is shown.

The first feature of the finalized effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the finalized effect is executed, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating an effective period is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the definite effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45)
Here, as the first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed by a dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by an effective period of the effect button 17. When the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed by the step-up notice effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the jackpot expectation degree (vibration effect due to the pattern alignment (strong vibration 4)) The rate at which seconds) are executed, the rate at which vibration effects (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) are executed in the determined effect, etc.) are high. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1) is performed by the dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by the effect period of the effect button 17, as compared with the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed by the step-up advance notice effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. When the second or strong vibration (1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation (the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed, and the vibration effect (strong vibration) is determined later. The rate at which 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect (step-up at the time of the dialogue notice effect) in which the vibration period is relatively short. Vibration production (1 second) during advance notice production, pseudo continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful production) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second at the time, final effect, etc., and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) And a variable effect with a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed in the first effect period than in the second effect period (the rate of execution is higher). There are points. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect having a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach) is after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable staging with a certain staging, the first staging period is more vibrating in the first staging period (during dialogue notice staging, step-up staging, pseudo-sequential staging, development staging, etc.). The point that the staging (1 second)) is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot advance notice effect includes the first vibration effect having a short vibration period (during the dialogue advance notice effect and the step-up advance notice effect). , Vibration production (1 second) during pseudo-continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.) with a longer vibration period than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (normal reach effect). In the variable effect with SP / SPSP reach effect), the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the second effect period than in the first effect period. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach) is after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a certain effect, the third effect period is longer than the first effect period, and the second vibration effect (cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, etc.) is longer than 1 second. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 17 in the normal state in the first effect period (pre-reach effect). It is mentioned that the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that during the third effect period (during SP / SPSP reach effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and a second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is performed. The rate of execution is higher than the rate of executing the second vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during the dialogue notice effect and step-up notice effect). , Vibration production (1 second) during pseudo-continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, confirmed) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during production, and a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed. In the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) Points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect has a second vibration effect (effect period) longer than that of the first vibration effect (the second vibration effect). There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in effect, successful decision effect, and final effect, and during effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect of, the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (even symbol) is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach effect by the first type effect symbol (odd symbol other than "7"). ), The reach effect is more difficult to be executed by the third type of effect symbol (“7” effect symbol) than the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (the rate of execution is low), and the second type effect symbol is executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the reach effect by the third type of effect symbol is executed than when the reach effect by the third type is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of staging symbol that executes the reach staging, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that in the jackpot variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, a vibration effect (display of an operation promotion image) without an effective period (display of an operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect is performed. Vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, final effect) without valid period (display of operation promotion image) during post-reach effect, rather than the number of executions of look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, final effect) ) Is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation during the production after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) rather than a jackpot variable effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed more times in the jackpot variation effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C symbol alignment, final effect) without a valid period during the post-reach effect. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that in the loss variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, a vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C) without a valid period during the post-reach effect is achieved. The number of executions of the vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, final effect) without a valid period during the pre-reach effect tends to be larger than the number of executions of the pattern alignment and final effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration effect without a valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is performed in the variable effect, rather than the pre-reach advance notice effect. When the post-reach notice effect (cut-in effect) with high jackpot expectation is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is easier to be executed (execution rate is high), and the pre-reach advance notice effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more post-reach advance notice effects than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the jackpot expectation is high when the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect modes A to C (normal game state) vibrate with the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 in the post-reach advance notice effect than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the production is executed may be high. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the effect button 17 vibrates more than when the effect button 17 vibrates during the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect. The jackpot expectation is higher when the production is executed, and in the jackpot fluctuation production, the post-reach production (successful decision production) is performed regardless of whether or not the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production. In the later period), the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned or C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is a vibration effect (simulated at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect) accompanied by the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 executed during the variable effect. One of the vibration effects (one of the vibration effects such as continuous production, development production, cut-in production, etc.) is executed in any of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations. Vibration effect without the validity period (display of operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 executed during the variable effect (one of the vibration effects such as step-up notice effect, symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) Is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without an effective period, it is possible to prevent the production mode of the vibration effect from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is a vibration effect (speech notice effect) accompanied by an effective period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) in the pre-reach effect period in the jackpot fluctuation effect. The vibration effect of time) is executed, and the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) without the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed, and then (the vibration effect at the time). The ratio of vibration effect (vibration effect of 3 seconds or more at the time of successful decision, pattern alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) is different during the effect period after reach), and the vibration effect does not accompany the validity period of the effect button 17. (Vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is easier to be executed (higher execution rate) in the normal game state (effect mode A to C) than in the specific game state (effect mode D to G). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that when the jackpot variation effect is executed, the type of the jackpot effect symbol (even symbol, "7") that aligns the symbols (including the C symbol alignment). It is possible to make the execution mode (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the jackpot notice effect different depending on the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol). When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol that aligns the symbols (including the C symbol alignment). Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big hit by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The nineteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the valid period (effective period (decision success effect, etc.)) is performed after the vibration effect (decision success effect, etc.) accompanied by the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in the jackpot fluctuation effect. It is possible to perform vibration effects (design alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) without operation promotion image display), and operation of the effect button 17 for vibration effects (decision effect, etc.) with an effective period (operation promotion image display). While the timing to start vibration changes depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for the vibration effect (symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image). Be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the same movable member (second) is used in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Although it is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), the specific effect is performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point that the jackpot expectation when is executed is different. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the expected degree of jackpot differs between the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is possible to execute stage effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (specific game state). If the staged effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) are the same stage (if it is a step-up notice effect, either the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, or the 5th step effect, or if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, then There is a difference in the degree of expectation of a big hit when it progresses to once or twice). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the expected degree of jackpot differs between the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and the operation effects (any of the development effect, the cut-in effect, and the determined effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normally) can be executed. The jackpot expectation when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed differs between the game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect modes A to C (normal game state). ) And the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the effective suggestion effect is executed and the operation is promoted as compared with the case where the operation promotion effect is executed without the effective suggestion effect being executed when the operation effect is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the production is executed can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effective suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second) executed in association with the jackpot notice effect is the effect button 17. There are cases where it is executed with a valid period and cases where it is executed without a valid period, but the vibration effect that is executed with the jackpot notice effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). Is executed with a valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect on the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the control CPU 141a.

First, the integrated CPU 141a prohibits all interruptions in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial settings such as built-in register settings, access permission to the central RAM 141c, initialization of the entire RWM area of the central RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. ), Etc., and in step T3, all interruptions are permitted.

The control CPU 141a performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) and display device (first image display device 70, second) of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71) and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, and any of the initial values of the volume value (0 to 5). ), The initial value of the light amount value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light amount value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Perform processing.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed if the gaming machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is started).

The control CPU 141a performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, it is output from the voice output device 9 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the production sound.

The control CPU 141a performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display) is based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a). .. Further, from the power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc. Important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unauthorized winning) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error (until the timer interruption is started on the main control board 110) , Abnormal prize, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are also regulated (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various effect sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction.

The control CPU 141a performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The general CPU 141a performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

The general CPU 141a performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, is the control CPU 141a set with a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in the control RAM 141c? Judge whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag sets the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed) is controlled by the control unit 141. Is set by the V blank interrupt process that is executed every time it is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The control CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the control RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) will be performed. That is, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot advance notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

It should be noted that the effect directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 m and the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84, and the effect of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74). Regarding the operation), it may coincide with the frame update timing, or it may not coincide with the frame update timing.

The control CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variation effect and at the end of the variation effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can operate it. Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification of (door opening error) (output of notification sound), the volume and light amount can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume and light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Is now regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various effect sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various staging sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the notification of abnormality (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
FIG. 47 will be used to describe the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit 150. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Perform processing such as setting to "2". The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 47, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 47, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is “0”. do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-2. 1 Set to the movable member 73, and move the process to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the second movable member 74, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

The lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-6, and the movable member is moved for a predetermined time in step R105-7. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred. , Step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 can be driven, and the board accessory processing number is changed. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-20.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R105-13 whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

The lamp CPU 150a drives a button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position in step R105-14, and the effect button 17 is set within a predetermined time in step R105-15. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return error has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. Ends the origin return processing of.

The lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c in step R105-17, and clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer in step R105-18.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-22. Set "2" and end the origin return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable). The origin position is returned to the origin position in the order of the member 73 → the second movable member 74). Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separating, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying a load to each other so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress various inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. It is possible to execute the return operation to the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. When both of the return operations to are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories. ..

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 return to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position. The operation of returning to may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. Will be.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command when the power is turned on and the presence / absence of return abnormality information by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. do.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the processes, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 as the initial operation of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command by referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are set. It can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 constituting the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete failure or damage of the effect button 17 by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. If this is the case, the initial operation processing will end. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is such that the other performs the effect operation. It disappears.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of a board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 is in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin. The second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → origin return without the first movable member 73 operating. During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → origin return → large descent → origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

The "initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
The "initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light in blue, the result is the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04.
The "initial operation pattern 08" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
The "initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is the first movable due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is the second movable due to the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the board accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. It can be mentioned that the operation modes (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, when the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and / or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It will be possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is the same, but the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED differs between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the second movable member LED The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. The difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the first movable member LED is turned off. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as at the time of power restoration for restoring the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the second movable member has no return abnormality in the first movable member 73. When the 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of command at power ON and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and the effect button LED is activated during that period. Lights (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return. During that period, the effect button lights up (lights up) in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or the third power supply restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is received. The effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the effect button LED turns off during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17, the vibration time of the vibration effect executed during the fluctuation effect (at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect). Vibration production, vibration production at the time of step-up notice production, vibration production at the time of pseudo-continuous production, vibration production at the time of development production, vibration production at the time of cut-in production, vibration production at the time of decision production, vibration production at the time of re-lottery production, The time is different from the vibration effect at the time of the final effect).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the frame accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (effect button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to make it. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in the initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of turning on the power and at the time of restoring the power to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the above. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is produced during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which is not detected whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 17 is overlaid with the initial operation of the effect button 17 to be detected. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T9, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage. The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights up in white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the lighting is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1" and the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is displayed in a display mode indicating “1”, and the winning sound “pon ♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights up in white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the lighting is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1" and the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating “1”, and the winning sound “pon ♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the effect button 17 having a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation process ends when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lights), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) is set. After that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 55, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power on control command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage. The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights up in white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the lighting is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1" from the audio output device 9. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the lighting is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1" from the audio output device 9. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the effect button 17 having a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for a customer (white lit).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the variable display (loss variable display) of the special symbol and there is hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". , The audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen. 1 Maintain a state in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating “3”, and the sub second hold display 84 has a display mode indicating “0”.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T7, the first operation is started. 2 When the initial operation of the movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When a special figure stop designation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed on the image display device ( The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the static display state is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image (). The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

If the state after the power is restored is a special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold storage, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the fluctuation effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the staging control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after that, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which the effect can be executed.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect according to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the staging control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after that, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

The second standby screen was displayed when the staging control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the second standby screen.

In addition, the voice output device 9 was set to be silent when the power recovery designation command was received, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power was turned on is output. You may do so. In this case, it may be the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is ON.

When the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally, the effect control is performed from the first case, the main control board 110, in which the power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but the power is not supplied to the main control board 110. The second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including the half-inserted state), and the like can be mentioned. Case 3 will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110. When the number and the second hold number = 0) are received, the initial screen is maintained in the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. maintain.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T3, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, after the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the icon thereof) is displayed. Change to, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 64 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line and backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Is to display the standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is issued while the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). When the demo waiting time has elapsed after receiving or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the control state of the game is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is powered by a power source instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable effect (loss variation effect) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various characters have already been completed, and the big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on designation command is received is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) or the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). 17) The return operation and the initial operation are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 53, 54, or 55. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 65 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is replaced with the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol of the above, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 57, 58, or 59. Will be done.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 66 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the variable display is performed on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the reserved digit "1" is displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal map hold display 86) maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, a definite display is performed with a loss of the variation effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed). Is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the fluctuation effect of this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the confirmation display of the change effect by the big hit is performed. At this time, the image display device displays an effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and a confirmation screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a big hit display mode which shows that it is a big hit.

When the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". , And the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Depending on the mode, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 57, 58, or 59. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variation effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special figure stop designation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. , The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 67 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and right-handed is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The suggestive right-handed image MU is displayed, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is stopped and displayed (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. Further, the big hit display (lighting) is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is a big hit including the characters "Please restart the game (big hit)". The intermediate return screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) maintain the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 66 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

When the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. The screen will be displayed.

Further, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when the round number designation command is received while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the special jackpot effect is performed until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 57, 58, or 59. Will be done.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of staging symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer is restored to the waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to display the hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display does hold hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the returning screen is displayed), the change display (the change display is performed during the change display of the special symbol). Blinking display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). (Before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received), the display mode is set to indicate the hold number. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82) displays fluctuations (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) indicates the number of holdings in accordance with the start of this variation display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various accessories is performed. Therefore, the control for the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load for the return operation of various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, various accessories (first movable member 73, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c). During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the character that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is being continued. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the character having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) from the subsequent timing (timing at which the effect symbol 70a is displayed when the return operation is completed immediately). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during restoration). From the middle), the initial operation of various characters is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on and the main RAM 110c is initialized with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power recovery without the above, when the restoring screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the staging symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83). , The sub-second hold indicator 84) is configured to perform the initial operation after the display mode indicating the number of holds is set. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board after having the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84). ) Is displayed to indicate the number of pending items, and then the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory after having the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial timing of various accessories from the same timing as when the effect is displayed, that is, the timing after the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed). It is designed to operate. Therefore, the control related to the initial operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load applied to the initial operation of various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored only by displaying the initial screen. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command and receives a special figure hold number designation command based on the winning of a game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a winning sound is emitted. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even if the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even if the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is performed without executing the return operation or the initial operation of various accessories. Is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation or the initial operation during the execution of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the staging control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already commanded. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the main control board 110 is used even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the power supply is stopped, the recovery operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. (Including initial emission) is to be executed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed can execute the effect according to the command. Even during the control state, if the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed responds to a command. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted even during the control state in which the effect can be executed. Is designed to output the initialization notification sound again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the voice output device 9 does not execute the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of various accessories, but the initialization notification sound. May just output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the staging control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already commanded. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

It should be noted that the main control board is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 such as during a variable effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed executes an effect according to a command. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the staging control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect is produced in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect is produced in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. .. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Modification example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 68 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A case where the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the stop is described will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. Is lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Means that the standby screen in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display The device 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen of "135" which is the initial design when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed, or the jackpot is being performed. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the effect (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Figures 65 to 67 show, except for the customer waiting demo production screen, the fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and the jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 69 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, while the effect control board 130 is in the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states capable of executing the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped to supply the backup power supply. A case where the main power supply is restarted while the supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed on the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen by "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed, or the jackpot is being performed. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the effect (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Figures 65 to 67 show, except for the customer waiting demo production screen, the fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and the jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

In FIGS. 68 to 69, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it is possible to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed from the initial screen. , And the effect button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of various accessories from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the various accessories are not started from the timing when the initial screen is switched or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen. The initial operation of may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen is displayed from the standby screen when the power ON command (power-on specification command, power recovery specification command) is received. You may switch to the screen. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen, or the initial screen is changed to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormal notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and the initial movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are initially lit. The initial operation process ends without the operation being executed.

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1" and the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating “1”, and the winning sound “pon ♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the variable display is started by the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are started. The LED and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode). , The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power is restored, if the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member having the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed even for a movable member that does not exist. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as one movable member colliding with the other movable member and causing a failure. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member on which the return abnormality has not occurred) from stopping during the execution of the game (variable staging, jackpot game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED. Flashes red to notify the recovery error. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member, as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 are movable. The initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that does not collide with the member 74. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided on the effect button 17 returns. The initial light emission is performed without blinking red to notify the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has no return abnormality.

When the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed without executing the initial operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 without executing the initial operation. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Modification example of the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150.
Here, the same processing as the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 47 is designated by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different processing will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the start of power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process is transferred to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

When the lamp CPU 150a receives a power ON command for determining whether or not a power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received in step R102A. Moves the process to step R102B, and if the power ON time command has not been received, moves the process to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds in which the recovery operation and the initial operation should have been completed from the previous power ON) has elapsed, the process is transferred to step R103, and the predetermined time has not elapsed. In that case, the process is transferred to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

As described above, according to the bonus initial processing shown in FIG. 71, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various bonuses are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71, a power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery) occurs after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. When a designated command) is received, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the command when the power was turned on was transmitted later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110 has occurred). It becomes possible to grasp.

When a power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation of various accessories and the return operation of various accessories are performed regardless of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. , The initial operation may be performed. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and it is possible to simplify the process when the power ON time command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 72 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. In addition, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights alternately in red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as a command for turning on the power transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , The light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. finish.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on specification command is output and controlled. Upon reception by the board 130, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. .. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 76 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in).

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71. ..

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. At this time, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the effect is produced. The light emitting mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When it is finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71. ..

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.
Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. ..

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. When it is finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
In FIG. 80, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71, the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the variable display (loss variable display) of the special symbol and has the hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during the special figure change transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. The light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen. 1 Maintain a state in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating “3”, and the sub second hold display 84 and the sub-general figure hold display 86 have a display mode indicating “0”.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

When a special figure stop designation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed on the image display device ( The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the static display state is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image (). The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, when the power supply is started without supplying power to the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display are displayed. 86 is in a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the T4 When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and the second movable member ends at the timing of T6. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command.

When the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect according to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. When the light (white lighting) is turned on and the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

Since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 81, the description here is omitted, and the timing after T7 will be described.

When the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect according to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. It lights up (lights up in white).

The second standby screen was displayed when the staging control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the voice output device 9 was set to be silent when the power recovery designation command was received, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power was turned on (which makes it possible to grasp) is emitted for a predetermined period. The output may be made over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, it may be the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In FIGS. 81 to 82, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 shows a specific example in which the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, on the premise of a modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130 is disconnected, and the command communication line. There is a case where the connector of is not connected (including the half-inserted state).

Since the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 81, the description here is omitted, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, the special figure hold number designation command (the first special figure hold number and the first special figure hold number) without receiving the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110 is not received by the staging control board 130. , Second hold number = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off. It becomes.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, after the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the icon thereof) is displayed. Change to, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 84 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in (during power supply to).

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line and backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation is completed are already in the customer waiting state, and the image display device has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub-first). 1 Fluctuation display 81, Sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, Sub 1st hold display 83, Sub 2nd hold display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, Sub normal figure hold display 86) also display contents. maintain.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as the initial light emission, and the image display device is powered by a power source. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the sound output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already being executed or the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) of various characters are performed. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on designation command is received is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) or the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). 17) The return operation and the initial operation are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

Further, when there is an abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories and the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 73, 74, or 75. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 85 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and staging control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in (during power supply to).

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. Instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) on the image display device. The second standby screen of the state is displayed.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second special figure hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. It ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED, and the customer is waiting. It lights up (lights up in white).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed in the same manner as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 77, 78, or 79.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 86 shows that, on the premise of a modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71, the origin return process and the variation effect after the initial operation process is completed are being executed (main control board 110 and effect control). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in (during power supply to a board 130).

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the variable display is performed on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the reserved digit "1" is displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub). The second variation indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-general figure variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal map hold indicator 86) maintain the displayed contents.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, a definite display is performed with a loss of the variation effect. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the audio output device 9 is displayed. A stop sound is output from. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the fluctuation effect of this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the confirmation display of the change effect by the big hit is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (stationary display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

When the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the first hold number of the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". , And the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED have the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 77, 78, or 79. It will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variation effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special figure stop designation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. , The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 87 shows the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are already completed on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71 (main control board 110 and effect control). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in (during power supply to a board 130).

Here, during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”). Is in a stopped display (static display) state. Further, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. Further, the big hit display (lighting) is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays the return-to-return screen for the jackpot medium, which includes the characters "Please restart the game (big hit in progress)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. Further, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-general). The holding display 86) maintains the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 86 is displayed. You may do so.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

When the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. The screen will be displayed.

Further, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when the round number designation command is received while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the special jackpot effect is performed until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED have the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but the special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 77, 78, or 79. It will be done.

In FIGS. 84 to 87, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of staging symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer is restored to the waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to display the hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display does hold hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the returning screen is displayed), the change display (the change display is performed during the change display of the special symbol). Blinking display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). (Before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received), the display mode is set to indicate the hold number. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82) displays fluctuations (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) indicates the number of holdings in accordance with the start of this variation display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various accessories is performed. Therefore, the control for the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load for the return operation of various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, various accessories (first movable member 73, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c). During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the character that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is being continued. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the character having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the initial operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load applied to the initial operation of various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power recovery without the above, the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) is displayed in a display mode indicating the number of holds (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). The initial operation is performed before. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , The sub hold indicator (sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84) performs the initial operation before the display mode indicating the number of holds is set (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It has become like. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the frame accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, the initial operation, and the operation of various accessories are performed. In addition, the initial light emission is executed and the display of the initial screen is continued. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the display of the initial screen is continued due to the failure to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command). , When the effect control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, when the special figure hold number designation command based on the prize of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the start port is received, the prize is won. It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the staging control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already commanded. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the staging control board 130 such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. Will be possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed can execute the effect according to the command. Even during the control state, if the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission of various accessories. You may just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the staging control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already commanded. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

It should be noted that the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the return operation of various accessories and the effect during the variable effect or the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 executes an effect according to a command, such as during a variable effect or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the staging control board 130 are different, the difference can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect is produced in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect is produced in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. .. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

The control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command is a customer waiting state, a variable effect, or a jackpot effect, but the main control board 110 after activation is used. The state of waiting for a command (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

(Specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
88 (a) and 88 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is integrated into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. And.

First, FIG. 88 (a) will be described.
FIG. 88A is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and only the first start port detection switch 45a is not connected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the characters "connection error detection" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "connection error". A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice of is output.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, it is detected that the connection error is canceled by the main control board 110. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88 (b) will be described.
FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are not connected. The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device has the characters "magnetic error detection" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detection" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the "connection error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the characters "detection" is displayed, and a magnetic error notification sound including an alarm and a voice "magnetic error" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board It is detected by the 110 that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error are canceled, but various error notifications are continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

When the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the main control board 110 does not detect the occurrence of a connection error and causes an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) connected to the main control board 110. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (half-insertion of the connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and it is possible to take a prompt response.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is not provided. Even when the connection state is restored to the connection state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error is continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the error notification is not performed even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state. Therefore, the game can be continued as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , Various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88) from the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (when the display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen starts). Radio error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first start port detection switch 45a is used. The connection error notification may be canceled when the connection state is changed from the unconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, the radio error notification sound related to a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than the magnetic error and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than the radio wave error are referred to as magnetic errors. If they occur at the same time, they are not output, but the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. May not be output.

Further, when the first start port detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, the special figure determination information is acquired as if the start prize has occurred, and the number of the first special figure hold (U1) is increased, whereby the special symbol is displayed. The variable display and the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be executed.

(Specific example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
A specific example of operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) while waiting for a customer will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effective suggestion effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed. The valid period while waiting for customers when the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 18 is valid (since the valid period while waiting for customers is maintained until the variable effect is started, the valid period during the variable effect is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the variable effect. Can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) for guiding the game assist function started by the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 18 is displayed at the lower right of the first image display device 70. Specifically, the volume can be adjusted by operating the first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and the up / down buttons of the cross key 18. The second image (the image that imitates the cross key 18 whose up and down buttons are bright colors) and the third image (the left and right buttons) that suggest that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18. An image that imitates the light-colored cross key 18) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the effect button 17 is displayed so as to overlap the front of the effect symbol 70a without vibrating, and the menu image MG is displayed. Display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, and a "customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a final effect). A "Pachilog" item for managing the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.) is set, and the currently selected item is displayed in light color, while the current non-selected item is displayed in dark color. It is designed to be displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating as shown in FIG. 89 (c). Further, the erasing sound of the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the volume value image OG showing the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18. At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the staging sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the staging button 17 or the cross key 18. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the cross key 18 in this state, the volume value image OG is deleted and the guide image AG is displayed again as shown in FIG. 89 (f). ..

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, the effect button 17 relating to various advance notice effects (speech advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) generated during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a longer period than the effective period, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (by vibrating the effect button 17). (Including the indirect vibration of the transmitted cross key 18) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

In addition, regarding the validity period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment that occur during the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) and the big hit effect (big hit game), various advance notice effects (line) that occur during the variable effect are also given. It can occur for a longer period than the valid period related to the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc., but in the effective period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment. Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable effect or the jackpot effect, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that causes the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, for the valid period waiting for customers, the effective suggestion effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur before the effective period occurs is not executed. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game) is also an effective suggestion effect (introduction) before the effective period occurs. The production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect. The valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, rather than when the effect button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image), it is easier to execute the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, the valid period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects generated during the variable effect is a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.). There is a relatively long second valid period (valid period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the decision staging, etc.), and the valid period of the staging button 17 that occurs during the variable staging. The effect button 17 is operated when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period than when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting valid period which can occur over a longer period. It is easier to perform a vibration effect that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for customers, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 at a predetermined ratio may be executed, but even in this case, a variable effect is performed. At a lower rate than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the process. It is good to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example when variable staging starts from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 91 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 92 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 90 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demo production is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E and the second special figure hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TI are not displayed. ..

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the non-animation increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is a notification sound when the icon is generated, is performed. The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1". , And the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the fluctuation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal fluctuation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first special symbol hold number by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are displayed. It will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure holding number displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E is from "1" to "0". , And the first hold icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left middle right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, one frame that minimizes the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon by non-animation. Since it ends in a minute period (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so that it will not be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is after the timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update) (frame). (Update) Since it continues until the timing, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special figures held has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure holdings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the holding number is reduced by non-animation and the holding icon is changed by animation to the icon. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special figures held has decreased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 94 when the number of holds increases during the variation staging. FIG. 93 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the variation effect, and FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 93 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is the 50th frame after the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started. To.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure holding number displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E is from "0" to "1". , The first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in a very small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special figure reservations increases, the increase display by non-animation of the hold numbers and the increase display by animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the number of special figure reservations has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the interest of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special figure reservations changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special figure reservations has increased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure reservations increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special figure reservations increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the hold number and the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special figure is held. It is possible to effectively produce the increase in the number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon (20 frames), the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever? May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special figures reserved has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96 when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease. 95 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (f) are diagrams showing an example of an effect corresponding to FIGS. 95 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96A, in the first image display device 70, the staging symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first special symbol hold number by non-animation, the change display of the first hold icon by animation to the icon, and the first hold icon. Animation reduction display of is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96B, in the first image display device 70, the first special figure holding number displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E is changed from "2" to "1". It changes to. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the 1st special figure hold number is started, but since the change display and the decrease display of the 1st hold icon are being executed, the increase display and the icon of the 1st hold icon are being executed. The output of the generation notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are started (40th frame after the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon that has been waiting is started, and the output of the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TI, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96E, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special figure pending increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the (frame update) timing, the player indicates that the special figure hold number has increased even while the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special figures held increases during the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for ( (Restriction), and when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special figure hold It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed from normal). The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) shortly before the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special figures held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for, as in the case of the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. (Restriction) On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example of an increase in the number of holds during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. FIG. 97 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 97 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect symbol 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the first image display device 70, in the effect symbol 70a of "75" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) is displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the staging symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable staging). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the icon generation at this timing The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure holding number displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the final production of the confrontation production (decision production to notify whether it is a big hit or not) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“555”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swayed state). become). Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Then, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display with the same combination "555" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special figure hold, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special figure hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special figure reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it was done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special figures held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). However, it is advisable to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special figure reservations increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the reservation number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example in which the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases / decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 100 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 101 (g) to (i) are shown in FIGS. 99 (a). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the staging symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100A, "1" is displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure holding number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the second hold icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TI is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is displayed at the upper right of the screen toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variation staging). At this timing, the increase display of the first special figure hold number by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated are started. The generation notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variable staging. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, the "special time end" indicating the end of the specific gaming state, and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of big hit games executed in the character "Big hit x 1" is displayed. Further, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation staging). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the second hold number by non-animation, the change display of the second hold icon by animation to the icon, and the reduction of the second hold icon by animation. The display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and at the same time, The second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icon (white icon) H22 to H24, which has been set, starts moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. The second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located in the center of the adjacent display unit along with the icon TI, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed. Stop.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first special figure hold icon is waited for (restricted), while the increase display of the first special figure hold number is displayed. Since it starts, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased even while the specific effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the number of the first special figure hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is performed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the increase display of the 1st special figure hold number that was executed before that, you can recognize that the 1st special figure hold number has increased, and you can enjoy the game. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special figure is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of hold 1st special figures increases more than once during the specific game state, the increase display of the hold number is executed, while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of reserved first special figures increases during the specific game state, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ) May be set (displayed) only in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure holding number display area 70E and the second special figure holding number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71. It may be set (displayed) to, or it may be set (displayed) to a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of reserved special figures according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when pre-reading operation effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103.

First, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and three white icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the variation effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and 3 as shown in FIG. 102 (b). One hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead operation effect over the three variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak operation that operates toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the hold icon (left end in the figure), which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect, changes to a blue icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 102 (c). (Preparatory operation) is completed, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the first effect of the look-ahead operation effect is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss of "365". ..

Further, when the next variation effect (corresponding to the advance variation) is started after the stop time of the effect symbol has elapsed, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2" as shown in FIG. 102 (e). Is changed to "1", and the two hold icon HIs start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead operation effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak operation that operates toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the hold icon, which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect, changes to a red icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 102 (f). After the end, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second effect of the look-ahead operation effect ends. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 103 (g), the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635". ..

Further, when the stop time of the effect symbol elapses and the variation effect (corresponding to the variation) that is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 103 (h), the first special figure hold number display. The area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead operation effect is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, performs a strong operation to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 103 (i), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a ends, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then. The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third effect of the look-ahead operation effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a is started, the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 103 (j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 103 (k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is produced. Is output. Further, the weak vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 for 1 second is started while the effect button 17 is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (effect sound) is not output when the sound is generated, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

When 1 second elapses from that point, as shown in FIG. 103 (l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, after the number of holds displayed in the special figure hold number display area decreases with the start of the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a starts the preparatory operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the effect symbol 70a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead motion effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the look-ahead operation effect is performed after the movement (shift) of the hold icon is started with the start of the variable effect and before the movement of the hold icon is completed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead motion effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the vibration effect is not executed during the first to fourth step effects of the step-up notice effect, but the vibration effect is performed during the fifth step effect, which has the highest expectation. It is designed to run. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the execution period (1) of the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect is larger than the execution period (3 seconds) of the fifth step effect of the step-up notice effect. Seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect is not superior to the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect is not accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17, so that the operation promotion image (display of the operation promotion image) is not accompanied. The effect sound when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound, operation effect sound of movable members, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the valid period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the effect light emission and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the effect emission and the lamp change effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Although the effect button 17 is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (big hit confirmation) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the rainbow color, which is the emission color, may be emitted in a emission mode different from the emission mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is attracted attention depending on the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). The staging light may be emitted.

(Example of effect when pre-reading vibration effect and dialogue notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the look-ahead vibration effect and the dialogue advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.

First, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and three white icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the variation effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and 3 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). One hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead vibration effect over the three variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second, and the effect button 17 blinks white for 1 second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the staging sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues.

After that, when the hold icon (left end in the figure), which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, changes to a blue icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 104 (c). (Preparatory operation) is completed, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the first effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss of "365". ..

Further, when the next variation effect (corresponding to the advance variation) has elapsed after the stop time of the effect symbol has elapsed, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2" as shown in FIG. 104 (e). Is changed to "1", and the two hold icon HIs start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second, and the effect button 17 blinks white for 1 second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

After that, when the hold icon, which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, changes to a red icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 104 (f). After the end, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 stop, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635". ..

Further, when the stop time of the effect symbol elapses and the variation effect (corresponding to the variation) that is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect is started, as shown in FIG. 105 (h), the first special figure hold number display. The area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 blinks red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 105 (i), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the look-ahead vibration effect Strong notice will remain on. After that, the strong vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 stop, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect ends.

Then, when the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 105 (j), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue advance notice effect starts. Will be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 105 (k), the heat dialogue "What is this !? It's hot !!" is displayed in red letters. , The voice (directing sound) corresponding to the heat dialogue is output. Further, while the effect button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second. The lamp change production is continuing.

When 1 second has elapsed from that point, as shown in FIG. 105 (l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 is stopped and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and an SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. It will be executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, after the number of holds displayed in the first special figure hold number display area decreases with the start of the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a is a preparatory operation). The look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking white) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the look-ahead vibration effect is performed after the movement (shift) of the hold icon is started with the start of the variation effect and before the movement of the hold icon is completed. (Vibration of the effect button 17, blinking white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to blink in white without the validity period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even when the effect button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 in the look-ahead vibration effect is a notice effect (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in) accompanied by the occurrence of an effective period. It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, determination effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pre-reach advance notice effect makes it difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect that is difficult to judge by appearance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pseudo-continuous effect makes it difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect that is difficult to judge by appearance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice effect. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the dialogue advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the vibration effect executed during the look-ahead vibration effect does not involve the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17, so that the operation promotion image (opaque). The display sound when displaying the effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound, operation effect sound of movable member, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the valid period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. The display sound when displaying the button image (button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation effect sound, dialogue sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the effect emission and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. There is. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the effect emission and the lamp change effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmation) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is attracted attention depending on the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). The staging light may be emitted.

(Example of production when pseudo-continuous production is executed before reach production)
An example of an effect in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 106.

First, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. In the middle region, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo-continuous success effect is started without the valid period of the effect button 17 occurring. Specifically, in the middle region, a fanning effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, when the fanning effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region, and the success sound effect is output. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, and at the same time, a weak operation is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates. "X2" indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of the production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. The 70a is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the middle region, and a pseudo fanning effect is executed in the middle region to encourage whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. At this time, the valid period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 106 (e), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo-continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. .. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When 1 second elapses from that point, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 is stopped and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, and a strong operation is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates and the number of pseudo-variations (the stage of the effect progresses). “× 3” indicating (what you have done) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the pseudo-continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 106 (g), the effect symbol 70a of "5" in the left area and the right area. Temporarily stops and the normal reach effect is executed, and then the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. It will be.

(Example of production when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
An example of an effect in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 107. Since FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (c) are the same as those of FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (c), the description thereof is omitted here.

When a predetermined period elapses from the state of FIG. 107 (c), as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stops in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), when the pseudo-ream effect is started, the pseudo-ream effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped in the middle region. At this time, an effect period of the effect button 17 is generated, and an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period is displayed. The button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region as the pseudo-continuous success effect, and the success sound effect is output. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When 1 second elapses from that point, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, and a strong operation is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates and the number of pseudo-variations (the stage of the effect progresses). “× 3” indicating (what you have done) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, the normal reach effect is executed, and then, according to the variable effect pattern. The SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at the time of executing the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-ream success effect is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-ream success effect. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-ream success effect without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the pseudo-ream success effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. The display sound when displaying the button image (button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation sound, success sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the reach effect, the type of the effect symbol that forms the reach state after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgraded from the type of staging symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach by odd symbol to reach by even symbol, reach from reach by "7" symbol to reach by even symbol or odd symbol other than "7" It is not supposed to be downgraded to). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and the interest of the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo continuous effect, the same timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effect period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo-continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
An example of the effect when the development effect is executed and the SP reach effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

First, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the SP development effect is started, the SPSP development pattern suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect, the SP development pattern suggesting the development to the SP reach effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect A roulette effect is performed in which a plurality of special effect symbols such as a pseudo symbol that suggests the execution of the above and a dregs symbol that suggests that the effect does not develop (is lost) are displayed in a slanting manner at a low speed. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the SPSP development symbol, the SP development symbol, the pseudo symbol, and the dregs symbol are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), it is notified that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle region and develops into the SP reach effect. In the roulette effect, since the type of the special effect symbol that is variablely displayed changes depending on the variable effect pattern, the special effect symbol that is variablely displayed (the special effect symbol that is not temporarily stopped and the special effect symbol that is temporarily stopped). Depending on the type of, it suggests whether or not the production will develop into a production with a high expectation of a big hit (expectation of a big hit).

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect is completed. As shown in FIG. 108 (e), the effect symbol 70a in the middle region changes again, and the effect symbols 70a in the left region and the right region are left and right at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect is started. The icon is hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
An example of the effect when the development effect is executed and the SPSP reach effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

First, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the SPSP development effect is started, the SP development symbol suggesting the development to the SP reach effect, the SPSP development symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach. A roulette effect is performed in which a plurality of special effect symbols such as a fully rotated pattern that suggests the development of the effect are displayed in a slanting direction at a low speed. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the SP development symbol, the SPSP development symbol, and the fully rotated symbol are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, and the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective. The effective suggestion effect suggesting that is started. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect of gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen is performed.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position at the lower right of the screen, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the valid period of the effect button 17 (long press 4 seconds) occurs, and the specific position at the lower right of the screen An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output. , The effect button 17 emits red light. The character "long press" is displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the effect button 17 is pressed and held for a long time, the speed of the variation display of various developed symbols is gradually slowed down, and the long press time becomes a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), the SPSP development symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region, the temporary stop sound effect is output, and the first movable member 73 emits light in blue to perform a strong motion effect. Will be done. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When one second elapses from that, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen is whitened out and the development effect is completed. As shown in FIG. 109 (f), the effect symbol 70a in the middle region is changed again, and the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen. SPSP reach production is started. With the start of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon and the icon are hidden.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, depending on the type of the special effect symbol (the special effect symbol that is not temporarily stopped and the special effect symbol that is temporarily stopped) that are variablely displayed in the roulette effect. , It suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high expectation of big hit (expectation of big hit). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of special effect symbol that is variablely displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the player's expectation for developing into a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit can be obtained by executing an effective suggestion production in the development production. It can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the development effect without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the development effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the vibration effect executed at the time of the development effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect button) is involved. The display sound when displaying an image (image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the development effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color which is the emission color for which the jackpot is confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. The color may be emitted in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing It may be executed until (after 0.5 seconds) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated at the time of the development effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the vibration effect is performed without generating the effect period of the effect button 17 at the time of the development effect. May be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and it becomes a big hit)
An example of an effect in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to become a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

First, as shown in FIG. 110A, the effect symbols 70a in the left region and the right region are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, and the SP reach effect is executed. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the SP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. It will be started. Specifically, two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the lower left and right sides of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. The operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 110 (d). Specifically, the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the third cut-in sound effect is output. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

After that, when 1 second has elapsed from the end of the output of the third cut-in sound effect, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect are ended, and as shown in FIG. 110 (e), the effect of "5" is produced in the middle region. Whether the symbol 70a is stopped or the effect symbol 70a of "6" is stopped is performed.

When a predetermined time elapses from that time, as shown in FIG. 110 (f), the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. Along with the start of the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) to vibrate, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow-colored light emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 continues. Further, when one second has elapsed from that point, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), they are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG. Is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 111 (i). Specifically, the reduced display of "5" effect symbols 70a is moved to the front side of the screen in a state where three are aligned (symbol alignment) and enlarged and displayed, and a non-promotion sound effect is output, but a plurality. The staging light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decorative LED is continuing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (j), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at a normal size, and the promotion failure effect ends. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 111 (k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three staging symbols 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 111 (l), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops. If there is a hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 111 (m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 111 (n), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the effect period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started without accompanying, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the round game is started.

In the case of a variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the eye-catching effect is executed by shifting to FIG. 111 (k) after FIG. 111 (g).

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. It is possible to suggest this to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in effect and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect are the same. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. The display sound when displaying the button image (button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, vibration during the cut-in effect when the effect symbols 70a in the display mode not including the character are temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment). Since the strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) is executed for a longer period than the effect, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the big hit has occurred, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode including a character are temporarily stopped (C symbol alignment), a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation) is performed. Vibration effect) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect, big hit confirmation) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 70a aligned or at the opening of the big hit game. Since the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) does not involve the validity period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the display sound effect and the valid period when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image). The effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effects, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the valid period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when the SP reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained, the vibration effect is executed while the effect symbol 70a, which is the big hit, is temporarily stopped. The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without making a mistake that the fluctuation effect is still continuing due to the vibration effect.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, although the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are set to continue the effect light emission during the occurrence of the effect period related to the cut-in effect, whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the occurrence of the effect period or from the start of the effect period is the effective time. It is also possible to turn off a part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs until the lapse of time, and then restart the staging light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then a plurality of cases are started. The rainbow emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after executing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character. If there is a loss as a result of the reach effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching effect or an effect that returns the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character. The effect symbol 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (2 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the cut-in effect or the promotion success effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the cut-in effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the promotion success effect. The reverse may be made, or the vibration effect may not be executed during the cut-in effect and the promotion success effect.

Further, the vibration effect is executed when the big hit result is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers or when the big hit result is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character, but the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is used. While the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the number. The vibration effect may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a and at the time of temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character.

Further, when the lamp change effect is executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon even during the cut-in effect). Although it emits light in color), it may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and a big hit is obtained)
An effect example 1 in which a determined effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 20 and a big hit is obtained will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the three effect symbols 70a form a reach state and are reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen to execute the SPSP reach effect. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the SPSP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the determined effect. It will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 5 seconds) occurs, and the effect state protrudes to the specific position in the center of the screen. The operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the determined success effect is started as shown in FIG. 112 (d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after vibrating the effect button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is started, and at the upper left of the screen. Temporarily stop with three production symbols 70a of "5" aligned. Further, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful determination effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 112 (e), the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors. A blessing production to celebrate the big hit is started while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed from that point, the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow-colored light emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 continues. Further, when one second has elapsed from that point, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), they are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG. Is output and the effect button emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the promotion success effect is started as shown in FIG. 113 (h). Specifically, the reduced display of the "5" effect symbol 70a is switched to the "7" effect symbol 70a, and the three "7" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved to the front side of the screen to be enlarged and displayed. , Promotion sound effect is output. In addition, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 3 seconds is started.

Then, when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs emit effect light (other than rainbow light emission). The light emitting mode) is restarted, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 113 (j), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three staging symbols 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (k), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops, and the icon reappears. At the same time, if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 113 (l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "777" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 113 (m), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the effect period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started without accompanying, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are completed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and a big hit is obtained)
With reference to FIGS. 114 and 115, an effect example 2 in which a determined effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 16 to become a big hit will be described. Since FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (c), the description thereof is omitted here.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 114 (c) or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment). The effect of temporarily stopping is performed at, and the effect symbol 70a notifies that the jackpot is a big hit, but at this point, the strong vibration effect is not performed. At this time, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the determination success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after vibrating the effect button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is started, and at the upper left of the screen. Temporarily stop with three production symbols 70a of "5" aligned. Further, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful determination effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors. A blessing production to celebrate the big hit is started while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 115 (g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three staging symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 115 (h), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops, and the icon reappears. At the same time, if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 115 (i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 115 (j), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the valid period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started without accompanying, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (effect sound) at the time of is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the round game is started.

If the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period related to the determined effect, or if the determined failed effect is executed after the valid period has elapsed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. 1 The failure effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and the failure effect sound is output. Further, a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are turned off, and then the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach loss result (for example, "565"). After that, when a predetermined period elapses, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. When one second has passed from that point, the staging symbol 70a is finally stopped with a reach loss, and the special symbol TZ is also stopped with a reach loss.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the determined effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. Can be suggested to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. By having a decision success effect, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the decision effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is different from the decision success effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling from the beginning, or to give the player an uplifting feeling after arousing the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game by the contrasting effect. ..

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the determined success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed during the determined success effect. Are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the successful decision production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is a big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the vibration effect (determination success vibration effect) executed at the time of the determination effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation is performed. Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) Is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration) is produced when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode that do not include a character are temporarily stopped (symbol alignment). Since the production) is performed, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the jackpot has been achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration) is produced when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode including a character are temporarily stopped (C symbol alignment). Direction) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 70a aligned or at the opening of the jackpot game is the effect button. Since it does not involve the valid period of 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the valid period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful determination effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the plurality of game board decorative LEDs were set to continue the effect light emission during the occurrence of the effect period related to the determined effect, whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the occurrence of the effect period or from the start of the effect period is the effective time. In the meantime, when some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are turned off and the success effect is determined by the operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are rainbow-shaped. It may be made to emit light. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, at the time of the successful determination effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are set to emit rainbow light, but while the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light, a plurality of. A part or all of the game board decoration LED may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You may.

Further, when the decision success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first. The rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started after the start, or the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 may be started first and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started. You may.

In addition, after the end of the blessing effect, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumed the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 was turned off. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect. May be continued.

Further, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then a plurality of cases are started. The rainbow emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after executing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character. If there is a loss as a result of the reach effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching effect or an effect that returns the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character. The effect symbol 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect symbol 70a to the display mode including the character.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful determination effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (3 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the successful decision effect or the successful promotion effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the successful decision effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful promotion effect. The reverse may be made, or the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful decision effect and the successful promotion effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a containing only the numbers after the blessing effect, or when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the eye-catching effect. However, while the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a containing only the numbers after the blessing effect, the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the eye-catching effect. It may not be done, or vice versa, and the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a of only the number after the blessing effect and after the eye-catching effect. It is also possible not to execute the vibration effect at the time of temporary stop of.

Further, when the lamp change effect is executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the decision effect, the winning opening lamp NR is displayed before the icon is hidden. Although it emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode), it may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs.

(Example of production when probabilistic mission production is executed during a big hit)
FIG. 116 will be described with reference to an example of an effect when the probability change mission effect of whether or not the probability change game state is reached is executed during the big hit (round game).

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 (opening vibration effect). ) Is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect ends, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the explanation of the probabilistic mission effect of whether or not the probabilistic game state is reached. Is started, and the text "Defeating the enemy is a definite change" is displayed until the end of the second round game.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the valid period (single hit for 5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs as shown in FIG. 116 (c). The probabilistic mission production is started. Specifically, the text "Destroy" is displayed, and an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed. , The display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the staging light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 116 (d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission was successful are displayed, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is completed, and a plurality of game boards are displayed. When the effect emission of the decorative LED is resumed and the third round game is completed, the characters "defeat" are erased and the round effect is resumed.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), the valid period of the effect button 17 and the cross key 18 (here, the tenth round game from the start of the ninth round game). A mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the probabilistic game state is started after a lapse of at least 11 seconds from the start to the elapse of 5 seconds). Specifically, the selection image of the production mode D and the selection image of the production mode E are displayed, and the characters "Please select the mode during the probability change with the cross key and confirm with the button!" As the operation promotion image, white. An opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits light is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 116 (g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in dark color). The option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 116 (h), the option image of the effect mode E is enlarged and displayed, and the first effect mode in the probabilistic game state is the effect mode. It is notified that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect ends. After that, when the 10th round game is completed, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect is completed, the probabilistic game state is started.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure sound effect is output. .. Further, the mode selection effect is not executed and the process shifts to the ending effect.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 116, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success effect and the execution period of the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed during the mission success effect. (5 seconds) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the mission success effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is an advantageous result for the player, that is, that a probable change state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 116, since the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed at the time of the mission success effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image). ) Is displayed, and the effect sound (success effect sound) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 116, the execution period of the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed at the time of the mission success effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 116, the vibration effect is not executed even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player misunderstands that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected staging mode than in the non-selected staging mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

It should be noted that, while the valid period related to the probabilistic mission effect is being generated, a plurality of game board decorative LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission, but whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the effective period is generated or from the start of the effective period is the effective time. When some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are turned off and the mission success effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 or the lapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. You may make it emit rainbow light. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, at the time of the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are set to emit rainbow light, but while the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light, a plurality of A part or all of the game board decoration LED may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You may.

Further, when the mission success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first. The rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started after the start, or the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 may be started first and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started. You may.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (3 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the mission success effect, the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the mission success effect.

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
An example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728". It is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display are started. The first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon, so that the icon change effect is started, and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and blinks red. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icon.

After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 117 (e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C on which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off with the erasure of the icon, and the lamp change effect at the winning opening lamp NR remains continuous.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 117 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 118 (g), the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Maintain the state.

Then, when the staging control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 118 (h). The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to a higher value jackpot effect symbol for the player). However, even here, the winning opening lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 118 (i), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The staging symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , The variation effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but is rectangular. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 118 (j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 118 (k), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The jackpot production symbol 70a (reach state before the power was cut off) of "777" suggesting the type of the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing the swing fluctuation / swing display). 3 ↓ 3 ”is a combination of staging symbols that is different from the reach combination by the staging symbol), and the stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is displayed by the winning opening lamp NR. The variable production ends without restarting.

It should be noted that not only the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, but also other variable effects (variable effect in which normal variation is executed, variable effect in which shortened variation is executed, variable effect in which normal reach effect is executed, SP reach effect). As for the variable effect), when the power supply stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation / swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. 753 ”missing effect symbol 70a, or the jackpot effect symbol that is the same combination of effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that formed the reach state before the power was turned off, or a combination of different effect symbols is stopped display (still display). Will be done.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) with a number having the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the staging symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 118 (l), the image display device is provided with information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is the first jackpot game). The including opening effect is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then displayed as a stop is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command (when the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the transition to the customer waiting state is performed after that, the customer waiting is performed after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When the state designation command) is received, the staging symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) without temporarily stopping the staging symbol 70a (sway fluctuation / swing display). Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss fluctuation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the combination of the staging symbols, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display) instead of the normal staging symbol. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as determining the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (still displayed) by lottery, the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and the power supply is executed when the power supply is stopped. It becomes possible to grasp that the variable staging that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In that case, the combination of jackpot staging symbols is stopped and displayed (still display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power supply is restored so that the control state of the game is restored, and that the variable effect that was executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable effect.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the combination of the jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop and display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that were used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot staging symbol that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the variable effect executed at the time when the power supply is stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), the player immediately knows that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to grasp.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the restart of power supply is the same as in the case where the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being aware of whether the loss fluctuation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (still display) is performed with a number having the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step is performed. Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect symbol 70a) is started, the icon display area 70C displays a square area image, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the power supply stopped while the hold icon is displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step is performed. Until the variable effect of is started, a square area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the hold icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is secured and the hold icon is displayed. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the reserved fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) If the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is a big hit without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (turns off or lights up in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, while reducing the control load after restarting the power supply, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as restarting the lamp change effect even though the variation effect is not executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but as in the case of loss, when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect symbol 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. May be started for the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which are the initial symbols at the time of power restoration, are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot is displayed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the effect symbol 70a in the reach state in the variable effect (to expect the jackpot game to be executed), the identification is specified. After the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if there is a loss, the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol 70a may be stopped and displayed (still displayed).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, it is one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the types of jackpot games executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that "444", "666", and "888", and the combinations of the jackpot staging symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game are "111", "555", and "999".

When the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1 ↓ 1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game executed after that is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of the same or different jackpot effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state). It is advisable to stop and display.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the combination is different from that of the effect symbol 70a, instead of the stop display (static display) with the same number as the effect symbol 70a. It may be set to stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display), while the power supply is turned on. If the player is in the specific game state (low-accuracy time-short game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) and waiting for customers after restarting and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a is not stopped or displayed (still display). The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (stationary display).

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during execution of look-ahead effect effect, hold icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 119 and 120 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the effect symbol 70B2 are started. The first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first hold icon (shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2) ( The display mode of the icon final display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon to start the hold icon change effect, and the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state accordingly. Change production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 119 (g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 119 (h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is a lamp. Keep the lights off without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 120 (i). The returning screen including the above is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the winning opening lamp NR remains off again.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 120 (j), the temporary stop display (sway variation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed. Without performing, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change effect is not restarted in advance. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, a white icon other than the blue icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the square area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 displays the variable display. 1 The hold icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if the newly executed lottery for the icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue icon according to the result, so that the icon changes. The production starts. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the winning opening lamp NR remains off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if the lottery for the alternative notice effect performed when the power supply is resumed is won, the mini character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB is moved so as to be framed out. A notice effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (l), the dialogue issued by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice "Chance has arrived!" Corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9. Is displayed to execute the dialogue notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

After that, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 120 (n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 120 (o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 120 (p), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333", which suggests the type of (1 jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

Further, if the special symbol stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a), the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation) does not stop and display. , The temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) will be continued.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration is stored. It is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without restarting the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of other continuous advance notice effects is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, the icon is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as a special icon is now displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variation effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, even when the icon change effect is executed again during the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. It is no longer executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information that will be changed to (rainbow) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (turned off or turned on in white) that does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, while reducing the control load after restarting the power supply, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as restarting the lamp change effect even though the variation effect is not executed.

(Specific example 1 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. 121 is a timing chart 1 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 121. This is an example of the production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E while the changing BGM is output is "2" in the non-animation for 1 frame. Is changed to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed as. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub first fluctuation display 81, but since the blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, it is expressed by the double circle that the fluctuation display is performed. It shall be. Further, it is assumed that the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is also represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. .. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 122 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 122 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 122 (d)). ..

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the background image scrolling continuously. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 122 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of BGM is extended and the output of BGM is maintained during fluctuation (see FIG. 122 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 122 (g)).

Then, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 122 (FIG. 122). g) See).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“962”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the icon TI continues the rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image scrolling and the icon TI rotation operation continue, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ, and variation display of the first lamp symbol LZ is extended. (See FIG. 122 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so that the customer waiting state (game waiting state). Move to. When the staging control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m performs a process for ending the variable staging.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a non-animation for one frame. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and a special symbol is displayed. The TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a loss mode (turned off) (see FIG. 122 (j)).

At the timing of T7, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging command transmitted from the staging control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, as in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive. Will be processed.

Here, a specific example 1 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a normal gaming state has been described, but it is basic even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state). The flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

When the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to a disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. 123 is a timing chart 2 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 123. This is a production example 1 to be performed.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. .. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 124 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 124 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 124 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 124 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 124 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 124 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 124 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 124 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 124 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first All the effect symbols 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect symbol 70a that is erased by the non-animation for one frame of the surplus hold icon HI displayed in the third of the hold icon display area 70B and deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 124 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 124 (h)).

When the surplus hold icon is deleted and the required hold icon is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon may be left as it is and the required hold icon may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continuously. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 124 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first special figure hold number becomes "0". In (the target of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario, and the effect symbol 70a is the book. The look-ahead zone production ends when it stops.

At the timings of T7 to T9, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of T10 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When it changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first special figure hold changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of holds and the staging control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m are grasped. If the deviation from the number of pending reservations is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Further, although the specific example 2 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state), The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 125. FIG. 123 is a timing chart 2 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 123. This is a production example 2 to be performed.

Since FIGS. 124 and 125 differ in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect and the icon change effect is executed as the continuous advance notice effect, the description of the common part is omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 125 (FIG. 125). d) See).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 125 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 125 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 125 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 125 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the third display hold icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. It is displayed second. In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). See FIG. 125 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 125 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is at high speed. It will be in the scrolled state with. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a red icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 125 (i)).

After that, when the staging control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first special figure hold number becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in the effect (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T7 to T9, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of T10 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When it changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first special figure hold changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of holds and the staging control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m are grasped. If the deviation from the number of pending reservations is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Further, although the specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state). The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure holdings is a predetermined number while displaying information), the holding icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of holding icons is displayed. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold information) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). If the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure hold is a predetermined number during the display of, the hold icon of a number one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number of hold is displayed. The icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is specified. For example, if the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holdings of 3), the number of holdings that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of hold numbers without doing anything. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 4 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. 126 is a timing chart 3 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 126. This is a production example 1 to be performed.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. .. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 127 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 127 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 127 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 127 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 127 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 127 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 127 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position ( The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 127 (h)).

Then, one required hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 127 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continuously. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 127 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the look-ahead zone effect ends when the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped.

At the timings of T7 to T11, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of T12 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". If it changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the number of holdings grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of holdings grasped by the staging control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow. Is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 4 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state). The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 128. 126 is a timing chart 3 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 126. This is a production example 2 to be performed.

Note that FIG. 127 and FIG. 128 differ in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the continuous advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 128 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 128 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 128 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 128 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 128 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 128 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 128 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. Period is extended (see FIG. 128 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the first and second hold icon display areas 70B is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is for one frame. It is displayed first in non-animation. In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variation effect) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position.

Then, one required hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the red effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 128 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change effect is executed at the same time as the icon shift display is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect ends, and the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 128 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T7 to T11, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of T12 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". If it changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the number of holdings grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of holdings grasped by the staging control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow. Is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 5 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state), The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure holdings is a predetermined number during the display of information), the predetermined number is not displayed without displaying the number of holding icons one less than the specific number. Hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure holdings is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of holding icons that is one less than the specified number is not displayed and the number is larger than the specified number. Two less hold icons are displayed, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is specified. For example, if the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holdings of 4), the number of holdings is one or two less than the specified number. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 6 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 is a timing chart 4 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. 129. This is an example of the production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. .. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 130 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 130 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 130 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 130 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 130 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 130 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 130 (FIG. 130). g) See).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130 (g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the customer waiting state (game waiting state) is set. When the staging control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m is from "3" to "0". The process of setting the standby timer until the customer waiting demo production is started is performed.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the 1st to 3rd positions of the hold icon display area 70B and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by one frame of non-animation to produce an icon change effect. The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed). , The special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a loss mode (turned off) (see FIG. 130 (h)).

At the timings of T7 to T13, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received while the first special figure hold number stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m is “3” has been described, but the first special figure has been described. The basic flow is the same as described above even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states of “4”, “2”, and “1” in the figure hold number.

Further, although the specific example 6 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state). The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, when the staging control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the staging symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. All staging symbols 70a (staging symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) are now displayed (mainly stopped) at the staging position, including the staging symbol 70a that is deviated from the stopped position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable staging has ended (shift to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the staging control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 7 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. 131 is a timing chart 5 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. 131. This is an example of the production.

Since FIGS. 129 and 131 differ only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command, the description of the common part is omitted here and is different. Only the part will be described.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure hold number stored (grasped) by the staging control unit 130m remains "3" and is a big hit. Processing is performed to start the opening effect of the game.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E is maintained at "3" and displayed in the effect symbol 70a and the icon display area. The hold icon HI and the icon concerned are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. Further, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in the loss mode (turned off), and the opening effect image is displayed (FIG. 132 (FIG. 132). h) See).

After that, if the staging control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure hold number designation command from the main control unit 110m during the big hit game or after the end of the big hit game (time saving game state, probability variation game state). , The number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command without animation for 1 frame.

At the timings of T7 to T13, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first special figure hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" has been described, but the first special figure hold has been described. Even when the opening designation command is received in any of the states of "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 7 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state), The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 131 to 132, when the staging control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the staging symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position is not displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the jackpot game The opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the staging control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 8 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. 133 is a timing chart 6 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 133. This is an example of the production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 134 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 134 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 134 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 134 (FIG. 134). d) See).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit The process for starting the variable effect without changing the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasping) by 130 m is from "1" to "1", that is, the number of first special figure reservations is performed.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second hold icon display area 70B without animation. In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). See FIG. 134 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 134 (FIG. 134). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 134 (FIG. 134). f) See).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect (the SP reach effect ends), the effect symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in the reach loss mode (“878”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 134 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 134 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 134 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon. A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 134 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T2 to T4, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when it cannot be received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" at the timing of T5 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is "1". When the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "0", the number of reserved first special figures changes from "2" to "2", and the number of reserved first special figures changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control. If the number of holdings stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 8 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state). The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, the number of special figure hold is predetermined while the hold icon (first hold information) of a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is the number, the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. Is designed to display a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved number in the sub first reserved indicator 83 or the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the special figure is displayed. Figure When the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of holdings is not displayed without displaying the number of holdings one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of special figure holds is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the hold icon is displayed by one more number (for example, one) than "0", and then the hold icon is shifted and displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, the number of reserved special figures is displayed while the number of reserved figures of "0" is displayed in the sub first holding indicator 83 and the first special figure holding number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that becomes "0", the number of holdings of "0" is not displayed without displaying the number of holdings that is one more than "0" (for example, one). Is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 9 when the staging control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 9 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a timing chart 7 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 135. This is an example of the production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 136 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 136 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 136 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". .. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 136 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 136 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable staging will not be performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 136 (FIG. 136). d) See).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second to fourth hold icon display areas 70B without animation. In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). (See FIG. 136 (e)).

Then, the required four hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 136 (FIG. 136). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 136 (FIG. 136). f) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T2 to T6, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m (winning command, stop command, start command). ) Can not be normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and the same processing is performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" at the timing of T7 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control If the number of holdings stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is larger than the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation. ..

Further, although the specific example 9 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state). The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 135 to 136, the number of special figure hold is predetermined while the hold icon (first hold information) of a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the number, after displaying a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three). , A specific number of hold icons are displayed by shifting the hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 135 to 136, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved number in the sub first reserved indicator 83 or the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the special figure is displayed. Figure When the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holdings is a specific number (for example, two) larger than the predetermined number, the number of holdings is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 135 to 136, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of special figure holds is a predetermined number (while the icon is being displayed). For example, when the staging control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is one), the holding icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then the holding icons are shifted. By displaying it, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 135 to 136, the number of reserved special figures is displayed while the number of reserved figures of "0" is displayed in the sub first holding indicator 83 and the first special figure holding number display area 70E. When the staging control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variation display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number is not displayed without displaying a number (for example, two) that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number of holds is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, if the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a, the staging symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the variable period of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the changing BGM are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no production is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, the scrolling of the background image, the hold icon, and the rotation operation of the icon continue during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect symbol 70a from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. It has become like. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, when the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Even if there is, the notice mode (type of icon, type of zone effect) of the look-ahead notice effect does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied without causing an abnormality in the progress of the pre-reading notice effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, when the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the staging symbol 70a, a predetermined stop is performed. The variable display is started after all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was planned to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived display) including the staging symbol 70a that is deviated from the position. It is designed to do. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable effect can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved as compared with the case where the variable display is started with the effect symbol 70a displaced from the stop position.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, when the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the staging symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol are used. The LZ is designed to continue the variable display without being stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the effect symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), it is possible to inform the player that the variable effect is being produced by the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon is set to the normal time. It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the newly executed variable staging to be hindered by erasing the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, the effect control unit 130 m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When the start command is normally received, the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 136, the effect control unit 130 m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When the start command is normally received, it is possible to execute the effect of the content according to the scenario of the look-ahead advance notice effect in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the progress of the pre-reading advance notice effect will not be abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player will be dissatisfied will be avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the staging control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 10 in the case where the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. 137 is a timing chart 8 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 137. This is an example of the production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed, and the number remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first special figure hold number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure displayed in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. The figure hold number remains "1", and the hold icon HI corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" in the first hold icon display area 70B is not displayed (FIG. 138 (a)). reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI is not displayed in the second corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" for which the winning command could not be received, and the first special figure hold number "3". The third hold icon HI corresponding to "" is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 138 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 138 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 138 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "2".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second hold icon HI corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" that could not receive the winning command in the hold icon display area 70B is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (in normal size from the beginning). (Displayed), the three displayed hold icon HIs are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 138 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 138 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“225”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 138 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 138 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 138 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon. A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 138 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of T2, the staging control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the staging command transmitted from the staging control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive is performed. Will be.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received in which the number of first special figure reservations is "3". However, when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received in which the number of first special figure reservations is "4". In this case, when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "0", the number of first special figure reservations is "2", "3", or "4". The basic flow is the same as described above even when the hour command is received.

Further, although the specific example 10 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state), The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the hold icon (first hold information) is in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure holdings is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three) when is not displayed, the predetermined number in the holding icon display area is specified. The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to the number (for example, the second), but the hold icon is displayed in the area corresponding to the specific number (for example, the third) in the hold icon display area. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the number (for example, 1) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) in which the number of special figure reservations is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) while the number of holdings is displayed, the predetermined number of holdings is displayed. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the hold icon (first hold information) is in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure holdings is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number when is not displayed, the predetermined number in the holding icon display area. The area corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number (for example, the third) from the area corresponding to (for example, the second). For example, the hold icon is displayed in the 4th). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holdings, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the number (for example, 1) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of holdings of (1), the number is larger than the specified number. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying one less hold. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas (for example, the second), and the hold icon is displayed from the predetermined number. When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the special figure hold number becomes a predetermined number while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to the specific number (for example, 3) which is one more. A predetermined number of hold icons are additionally displayed in the area corresponding to a predetermined number of hold icon display areas (for example, the second) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas (for example, the second) and the number one more than the predetermined number (for example). While the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, 4th) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to 3), the special figure hold number is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the specific number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area (for example, the second) and the number one more than the predetermined number. By additionally displaying hold icons in the area corresponding to (for example, 3) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then shifting the hold icons, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number can be displayed. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a hold icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning cannot be received normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 1 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the second embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124 (modification example 1 when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 139. 139 (a) to (i) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 123.

Since FIGS. 124 and 139 have the same timing from T0 to T9, the description of common parts will be omitted here, and only different parts will be described.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control is performed. Inconsistency (original deviation of 1) due to a command abnormality between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored (grasp) by the staging control unit 130m. However, since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone production ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are completed, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 139 (h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is for one frame. It is displayed second in the non-animation of. All the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the staging symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 139). See (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 139 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 139 (i)).

(Modification example 2 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 3 described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 125 (a modification 2 when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 140. FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (i) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 123.

Since FIGS. 125 and 140 have the same timing from T0 to T9, the description of common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control is performed. Inconsistency (original deviation of 1) due to a command abnormality between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored (grasp) by the staging control unit 130m. However, since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 2 or more has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect are completed.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). See FIG. 140 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 140 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 140 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the variation effect executed for the variation display of the special symbol in which the first special figure hold number becomes "0". Even in (the target of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect), the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, the number of first special figure reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the staging control unit 130m are the same. If an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality that is originally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs between them, a look-ahead notice effect (a look-ahead zone effect) , Icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) is finished. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the pre-reading notice effect being executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not normally the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

(Modification example 3 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 8 described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134 (a modification 3 when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 141. 141 (a) to (j) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 133.

Since FIGS. 134 and 141 have the same timing from T0 to T4, the description of common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit The process for starting the variable effect without changing the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasping) by 130 m is from "1" to "1", that is, the number of first special figure reservations is performed.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control is performed. Inconsistency between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored by the staging control unit 130m due to a command abnormality (normally 1 in the decreasing direction) Since the same number of abnormalities occurred where there is a divergence), the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the zone image display and the zone BGM output are completed, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation (). It is displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). See FIG. 141 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 141 (FIG. 141). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 141 (FIG. 141). f) See).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the reach loss mode (“878”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 141 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 141 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 141 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 141 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 141, a command is issued between the number of first special figure reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the staging control unit 130m. If an inconsistency due to an abnormality (an abnormality that is originally the same number where there is a deviation of 1) occurs, the look-ahead advance notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) should be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the pre-reading notice effect being executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not normally the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

(Modification example 4 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 (a modification 4 when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 142. 142 (a) to (f) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 135.

Since FIGS. 136 and 142 have the same timing from T0 to T6, the description of common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the staging control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold display 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control is performed. Inconsistency due to a command error between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored (understood) by the staging control unit 130m (normally in the decreasing direction) Since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the zone image display and the zone BGM output are completed, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth hold icon HI (white icon) returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation. Additional display (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the staging symbols 70a (the staging symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable staging) including the staging symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the staging position (instantaneous derivation display). See FIG. 142 (e).

Then, the required four hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 142 (FIG. 142). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 142 (FIG. 142). f) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 142, a command is issued between the number of first special figure reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the staging control unit 130m. If an inconsistency due to an abnormality (an abnormality that is originally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction) occurs, a look-ahead notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change) occurs. The production and look-ahead effect production) are finished. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not originally the target of the pre-reading notice effect, and the interest of the game is lowered. It becomes possible to suppress it.

(Modification 5 when the staging control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138 (a modification 5 when the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 143. 143 (a) to (j) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 138.

Since the timings of T6 to T11 are the same in FIGS. 138 and 143, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

First, at the timing of T0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the staging control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m The process for starting the variable staging is performed when the number of the first special figure reserved that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the staging control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 143 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the staging control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure holdings displayed in the sub 1st holding display 83 and the 1st special figure holding number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (gradually increasing from the minimum size). (See FIG. 143 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the staging symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the staging symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 143 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the staging control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation staging is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the staging symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 143 (d)).

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 143, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number of special figure reservations when it is not, it corresponds to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area. The hold icon is additionally displayed in the area to be used (for example, the second) and the area corresponding to the specific number (for example, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 143, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure reservations is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three) while displaying the number of holdings, the predetermined number of holdings is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 143, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. Occasionally, when the staging control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number of the hold icon display areas (for example, four). For example, the hold icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the fourth) from the second). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 143, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number while the number of holdings is displayed, the number is one less than the specified number. It is designed to display a specific number of holds without displaying the number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the staging control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 143, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130 m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as an icon change effect during display as the hold icon. Is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning cannot be received normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the effect lever device 23 is provided in addition to the effect button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. The description of the same part as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, a staging lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the portion of the upper plate 11 on the central bottom surface side so as to form the front and back of the staging button device 16.
The effect lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back sides of the effect button device 16, and the effect lever 24 and the effect lever 24 can be pulled toward the front side by the player. An effect lever detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the effect lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided, and the player can operate the effect lever 24 to allow the player to play the game machine. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration causes the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the effect lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one of the operation units, the vibration effect that vibrates the other operation unit (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut). When the vibration effect with / without the valid period of the operation unit related to the in-effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation unit. It is supposed to be done.

Further, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration serves as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the launch handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the above. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a determination effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the determination effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 145, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the selected determined effect pattern are associated with the determined effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 or a half imitating the effect lever 24. The transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are collected toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the determined effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 or 5 seconds elapses.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) for which the operation is valid during the valid period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 17 is used. The operation is effective, and if it is the "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 24 is effective.
The "promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period. Specifically, the effective suggestion effect is not executed or the effective suggestion effect is executed. As a result, the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button is displayed. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "normal lever" indicates that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect lever image, an effect lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 24 is displayed.
The "large lever rainbow" indicates that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect lever image, an effect lever image imitating an effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed.

The "operation unit state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period, and the "normal" means that the target operation unit is the effect button 17. If there is, it is a normal state in which it does not protrude, and "protruding" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in a protruding state. Since the staging lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color without the first movable member 73 operating, which suggests that the jackpot game is not executed. Indicates that is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow colors, and the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the decision success effect that suggests is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect starts (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, in which the strong vibration is vibrated for 4 seconds and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for emitting the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect is started (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (a period longer than that when the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly). Even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button red" <"normal lever" <"protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". Further, the jackpot expectation of each operation unit state is "normal" <"protruding".

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 145 is a vibration effect (determination success vibration) in which the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is vibrated by generating an effective period when the determination success effect is executed. The point is that the production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 145 is that the effective period occurs over the longest effective period during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 145 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates over the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect generated during the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 145 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is completed, the player's uplifting feeling can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17, effect lever 24) in the second embodiment.

The type of command at power ON and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, the effect button 17 is greatly raised, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2.5 seconds. After that, the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and then the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 vibrate intermittently (1.25 seconds vibration → 1 second interval → 1.25 seconds vibration) for 2.5 seconds. During that period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.

The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, the effect button 17 is greatly raised, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are pressed. It vibrates continuously for 2 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and during that period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue.

The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or the third power supply restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is received. As the effect button 17 rises significantly, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and the effect button 17 turns off during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds), the vibration time (line) of the vibration effect executed during the fluctuation effect. Vibration production at the time of advance notice production, vibration production at the time of step-up notice production, vibration production at the time of pseudo continuous production, vibration production at the time of development production, vibration production at the time of cut-in production, vibration production at the time of decision production, at the time of re-lottery production The time is different from the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of final effect).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the frame accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (effect button 17, effect lever 24) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to make it. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in the initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of turning on the power and at the time of restoring the power to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the above. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the vibration time of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 at the time of turning on the power or restoring the power is changed during the vibration effect. Vibration time (vibration effect during dialogue advance notice effect, vibration effect during step-up advance notice effect, vibration effect during pseudo-continuous effect, vibration effect during development effect, vibration effect during cut-in effect, vibration effect during decision effect , Vibration effect at the time of re-lottery effect, Vibration effect at the time of final effect). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 146 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor or lever vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. One point is that the effect button 17 is overlaid with the initial operation of detecting the presence or absence of the effect button 17. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

The effect lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the effect position so as to operate (move, vibrate) at the same time as the effect button 17 at the initial operation, or may be performed in a predetermined order (for example, the effect button 17). → It may be operated (moved, vibrated) by the effect lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the effect lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the “normal lever” is used in the determined effect, and the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position when the effect is “large lever”.

In addition, the effective period of the effect lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single stroke related to the determined effect, but the effect lever 24 is operated a plurality of times, for example, for continuous pulling 5 seconds, and each operation of the effect lever 24 is performed. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) as the effect is advanced (for example, the level gauge is raised), the success effect or the decision failure effect may be executed, or the prolongation of 5 seconds or the like may be performed. It is determined that the staging lever 24 is continuously operated, and the staging is advanced (for example, raising the level gauge) while the staging lever 24 is being operated, and the duration is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success effect or a decision failure effect may be executed.

Further, during the valid period related to the development effect or the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect lever 24 may be operated once when the effect with high expectation of big hit is executed, or the effect lever 24 may be continuously pulled. Alternatively, the effect lever 24 may be prolonged (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of continuous pulling, the effect is advanced for each operation of the effect lever 24 (for example, the level gauge is raised), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the SPSP development effect or the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed. It is good to be done. Further, in the case of prolongation, the effect is advanced while the operation of the effect lever 24 is continued (for example, the level gauge is raised), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development effect is performed. It is advisable to execute the pseudo-ream success effect.

Further, in order to prolong or continuously pull the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24, for example, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be slightly vibrated each time the effect progresses (the level gauge is raised to the next stage). good.

Further, the vibration intensity of the effect button 17 includes weak vibration and strong vibration, and the vibration intensity of the effect lever 24 has strong vibration. However, even if the vibration intensity is the same, the effect lever 24 has a higher vibration intensity than the effect button 17. The strong vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the strong vibration of the effect button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than the effect lever 24.

Further, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be different depending on the type of the effective period (operation promotion image: single hit, long press, continuous hit, long pull, continuous pull). For example, if the effect button 17 is hit for 3 seconds during a dialogue notice effect or pseudo-continuous effect, it is set to 1 second for weak vibration, and if the effect button 17 is pressed and held for 4 seconds during development effect, it is set to 1 second for weak vibration. If the single hit of the production button 17 at the time of in-production is 4 seconds, the weak vibration is 3 seconds, and if the single stroke of the production button 17 at the time of the final production is 5 seconds, the strong vibration is 4 seconds → 5 seconds. If the lever 24 is pressed and held for 4 seconds, the strong vibration is set to 1 second.

Further, when the hold icon or the icon changes to a display mode (for example, red or rainbow) with a high expectation of a big hit, the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 may be slightly vibrated or strongly vibrated for 1 second. ..

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, all three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (swaying operation), but the left and right effect symbols 70a are stopped and the central effect is produced. Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swaying operation). At this time, all three effect symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or the left and right effect symbols 70a do not perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), and only the central effect symbol 70a fluctuates (effect operation). ) May be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion fluctuate (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE Only one of the above may be made to perform a fluctuating operation (directing operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the identification unit consisting of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The texture (pattern on the surface, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or a light emitting effect may be added to the identification portion to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a, but the staging symbol 70a may be scaled. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the effect symbol 70a is displaced in the direction of contraction (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expansion (smaller than the normal size) from the stop position. If it is large), it is better to make it a normal size and display it at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a, but the staging symbol 70a does not swing and the decorative part and the number part protrude from the base image. It may be made to fluctuate like this. In this case, if the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction protruding from the base image, it will be in the state of being contained in the base image and displayed at the stop position. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the number portion (identification character) in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the decoration portion fluctuates when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the operation (effect operation) is not performed, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a symbol effect image, and the symbol effect image is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation operation (directing operation) may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a are not mentioned, but the frame lighting device during the extension of the temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission mode in which there is less change or movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the panel lighting device 76 has the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation). It may be set to (aspect, extinguishing). In this case, when the start command is received next time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 change (switch) to the light emitting mode according to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a in the lost mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), but the number is the same as that of the effect symbol 70a. The main stop may be made in such a loss mode. Further, when the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode (“333”), but the book is in the same number as the effect symbol 70a. You may want to stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit issues start commands (special symbol hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the staging symbol 70a. When the 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but even if the variable display is started after the derivation display is instantaneously performed as in the staging symbol 70a. good. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position may be displayed at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start time command or the customer waiting state specification command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased without animation for one frame, but at the time of stop. It may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of a command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, it is erased by animation for 5 frames. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command is received while the number of hold icons larger than the number of special figure hold icons is displayed, the surplus hold icon HI is deleted by one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of the stop command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example. It may be erased by the animation for 5 frames.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality that is the same number, abnormality that has a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command abnormality with the number of special figures held (understood), one is more than the specified number. After displaying a large number of hold icons, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed, but the predetermined number of hold icons are displayed as they are without displaying one more hold icon than the predetermined number. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, anomaly with a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command abnormality with the number of special figures held (understood), this start command is received. Although the icon is displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the above, the icon may not be displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the reception of the start command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the normal icon. May be good. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the special icon. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but the special icon or the specific icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) suggesting the change to the special icon is specified. A specific icon suggesting that the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon or the specific icon or the mode of the effect operation may be different from the form of the normal icon or the special icon or the mode of the effect operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the look-ahead specification command of the special figure hold number specification command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure hold number specification command is received. If the look-ahead specification command is not received normally, the hold icon is displayed, while if the look-ahead specification command is received normally without receiving the special figure hold number specification command normally, the hold icon is displayed. It may be avoided or vice versa. When the hold icon is displayed by receiving only one of the special figure hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command, the icon change effect for this hold icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by the operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the effect control unit 130 m does not accept the operation for changing the effect mode during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a based on the command abnormality that the command cannot be normally received, that is, the effect button 17 It is advisable to regulate the change of the effect mode based on the operation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon for prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is displayed. Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon for which is enabled is displayed, an operation change effect that changes the button icon to one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. .. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, projecting state in the effect position) at a predetermined ratio. You may do so. In this case, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue advance notice effect or decision effect. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may be an effect button image having only an outline instead of being semi-transparent, or it may be an effect button image having only a silhouette. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) when the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) or the development effect is executed. However, the frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4 to perform an operation effect of operating the frame movable member when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach advance notice effect or the development effect. Instead of the vibration effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of executing the post-reach advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, final effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , A frame movable member may be provided on the glass frame 4, and an operation effect for operating the frame movable member may be executed when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, or instead of the vibration effect. The motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the title indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, but the display mode (white characters, white characters, which have different jackpot expectations). The title may be displayed by any of the red characters that have a higher expectation of big hits than the white characters, the rainbow characters that confirm the jackpot, etc.), and the title display changes to red characters or rainbow characters after being displayed in white characters. You may let it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is performed at the final stage of the SP reach effect, but it is set to be performed at the middle stage (first period) or the final stage (second period) of the SP reach effect, and the SP reach effect is performed. Even if the effect button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (the rate of being in a protruding state is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle stage. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the effect button 17 is generated in the development effect, but an effective period for long-pressing the effect button 17 is generated as a jackpot notice effect other than the development effect. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that advances the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press is continued at a plurality of determination timings in the valid period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be advanced based on the determination result.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1>
In the conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied is stored as a hold memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable effect based on this. In such a gaming machine, an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold storage is performed, or an execution image corresponding to the hold storage in which the variation effect is executed is displayed. There was something that made the player grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of holdings when the number of holdings changes.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the effect of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases. Yes, the decrease display (1 subtraction) of the first hold information is performed from the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variation effect is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage decreases. When the number of the reserved storages increases, the increase display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information can be executed, and the reserved storage can be displayed during the decreased display of the second reserved information. When the number increases, the first hold is performed even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The increase display of information (update to the reserved number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variable display is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and when the number of the hold storage increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed. If the number of reserved storages increases during the change display of the second reserved information, the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means includes, the variable effect executing means capable of executing the variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and the first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage increases. If the number of hold storages increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the second hold information (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of hold storages. A numerical value) and information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages are provided, and the variation effect execution means is during execution of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) that is expected to execute the special game, and the information display means obtains the first hold information when the number of hold memories increases. It is possible to execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (1 is added). (Update to the hold number) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged). It is designed not to be done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the slave control means images a variation effect according to the result of the determination. A variable effect executing means that can be executed by the display means (image display device), a first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of hold storages, and a second hold information (holding information) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages. The information display means includes an information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and the information display means increases the display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as the first reserved storage, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. The determination information based on (the entry of the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as the second hold storage, and when the number of the first hold storage increases in the specific game state, the first hold information The increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second hold information (the last variation effect in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is restored). It is not executed until it is done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of holds.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information and executing the special game according to the result of the determination is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of playing a game. The member 74, the effect button 17), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. , The effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means operates the initial operation mode (operation) depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Aspects, light emission modes, etc.) are made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) capable of being operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and a power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the operating means after the start of power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game is provided, and the effect control means is initialized to the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is different between the case where the game is controlled and the case where the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. ), And the effect control means is an operation mode (number of steps) of the initial operation of the movable effect means depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. The operation mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the operation of each step is the same, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. The movable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect means include a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is a case where the control state of the game is initialized. And, in the case where the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means. Is designed to be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, it is advantageous for the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine capable of playing the game. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state, and the variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means. The staging control means (staging control board 130) capable of performing the accompanying variable staging is provided, and the plurality of staging symbols include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that can identify each of the staging symbols. When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means as the first combination (for example, "135"), and controls the game. Is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine in which the initial operation of the movable staging means was performed after the start of power supply (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that a suitable initial operation may not be performed for the movable staging means.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be made to operate, and the movable staging means that can perform the initial operation of the movable staging means after the start of power supply, and can perform the staging operation of the movable staging means during the execution of the game. The staging control means includes a control means (staging control board 130), and the staging control means has the movable staging means at the second position at the start of power supply (power recovery) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable staging means is returned to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be made to operate, and the movable staging means that can perform the initial operation of the movable staging means after the start of power supply, and can perform the staging operation of the movable staging means during the execution of the game. The staging control means includes a control means (staging control board 130), and the staging control means has the movable staging means at the second position at the start of power supply (power recovery) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the movable staging means is returned to the first position, and when the movable staging means is returned to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable staging means is not returned to the first position, the first position is not returned. The initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable staging means returns to the first position, and the first movable staging means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable staging means is The initial operation of the second movable staging means is performed without performing the operation. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be made to operate, and the movable staging means that can perform the initial operation of the movable staging means after the start of power supply, and can perform the staging operation of the movable staging means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In the case of, the first movable staging means returns to the first position, and when the first movable staging means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable staging means. Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be made to operate, and the movable staging means that can perform the initial operation of the movable staging means after the start of power supply, and can perform the staging operation of the movable staging means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and the second movable effect means is the first. When it is in the position, the first movable staging means returns to the first position, and when the first movable staging means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable staging means. Is not performed, but the initial operation of the second movable staging means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable staging means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is restored. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be made to operate, and the movable staging means that can perform the initial operation of the movable staging means after the start of power supply, and can perform the staging operation of the movable staging means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of itself. The staging control means includes a second movable staging means (second movable member 74) having an overlapping portion in the staging control means at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is to be initialized. When the first movable staging means is in the second position and the second movable staging means is in the first position, the first movable staging means is returned to the first position, and the first movable staging means is moved. When the staging means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable staging means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable staging means.

<Contents of the invention described in the present embodiment 4>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored, and the interest of the gaming is lowered. There was a problem that it could be done.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, it is advantageous for the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine capable of playing the game. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. Variations of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state and the determination means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an effect, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol that is variablely displayed is oscillated (temporarily stopped) and then statically displayed (temporarily stopped). (Stop display) is possible, and the effect control means is predetermined when the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect that swings and displays the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. At the timing of (when the special figure stop designation command is received, when the customer waiting command is received), the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed effect symbols, and the variable effect is provided with a reach state by some of the effect symbols. The effect control means includes a reach variation effect of displaying the formation and executing the reach effect, and the effect control means has a predetermined timing (when the power supply stopped during the execution of the reach effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. It is now possible to display the combination of the staging symbols different from the reach combination by the staging symbols that formed and displayed the reach state on the display means in the stationary state when the special figure stop designation command is received and the customer waiting command is received). There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game may be reduced. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The determination means of the main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination means. The game machine is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result. Is a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, including the second state. The mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and restored to the customer waiting state, and the operation is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode (initial screen + display of the returning screen) of the specific display when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect by a display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A staging control means (staging control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of the displayed staging symbol is provided, and the staging control means statically displays the staging symbol on the display means. After a lapse of a predetermined period, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed, and the control state. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different from the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the above or after the restoration of the control state. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 7>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variation effect on the display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game may be reduced. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. An effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped and the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol is provided, and the effect control means is provided with the effect on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the symbol, and to the determination information during the execution of the variation effect in the predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the corresponding execution information (the icon) can be displayed and the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next step is performed from the end of the specific display. Until the variable display is started, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the fluctuation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, JP-A-2017-143904). reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice production is restarted and the control state of the gaming is restored. there were.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means has a plurality of times of the variation effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect), and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice effect is restored. It is possible to execute a advance notice effect (for example, an alternative advance notice effect) different from the look-ahead advance notice effect in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game is executed over a plurality of variable effects in stages (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017). -Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the specific production is restarted and the control state of the gaming is restored. rice field.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over a plurality of times of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is turned on. The specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed after the stopped variable effect, but it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 10>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the determination information for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-06728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the restart of the power supply is high. There was a risk of becoming.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display, and the effect control means includes the determination information and the variation effect for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. It is possible to display the identification information (the icon, the hold icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (for example, a white icon) and a second stage mode (for example, blue). The power supply stopped during the display of the identification information that includes the icon) and the third stage aspect (red icon) and changes to the third stage aspect in the second stage aspect is resumed to control the game. Is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 11>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved storages, which are determination information for which determination has not been executed, in the display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-06728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, which is a hobby of the gaming. There was a problem that it could decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped, and the determination means. A game control state is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result. When it is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second). A hold display indicating the number of hold storages is displayed in each of the hold display 84) and the second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area. When the power supply stopped with the hold storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. It will be possible.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 12>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the interest of the game is enjoyed when the power supply stopped during the production suggesting the expectation that the special game is executed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. There was a problem that it could be reduced.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes. The means can execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the power supply that has been stopped is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variation effect is not executed. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 13>
A conventional gaming machine is provided with a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with a movable staging means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. Is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is specified from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. Etc.), it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation) is specified from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When a command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) are received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the variable effect can be executed from the main control means during the execution of the variable effect. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control means can execute the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means, and can also execute the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (operation mode such as the number of processes and the motion of each process) is the same depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. However, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot) capable of executing an effect according to the signal by differentizing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the effect), the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the starting port). ), A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and an initial control state of the game after the start of power supply. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be changed or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means is an initial operation (initial operation,) of the effect means. It is possible to execute the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display) of the movable effect means (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and to determine the determination means. Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the effect symbol displayed in the variable display is shaken. It is possible to perform a dynamic display (temporary stop display) and then a static display (stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings and displays the effect symbol. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol may be statically displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing (when the special figure stop designation command is received or when the customer waiting command is received) without swinging the effect symbol. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. ) Is received, it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold storage, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means. The display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display during the restoration) when the power supply stopped during the two states is restarted and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is different from that of the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the initial stage It is possible to carry out the operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the display means can be executed. When a predetermined period elapses after the effect symbol is statically displayed, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is displayed after the variation time of the variation effect elapses. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the initialization of the control state or the restoration of the control state. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. If so, it is possible to perform the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) over the variable effect a plurality of times, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the advance notice effect different from the look-ahead advance notice effect in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the look-ahead advance notice effect (for example, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command) is executed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which an alternative notice effect) can be executed and an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. , Power recovery designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to execute the variation effect a plurality of times. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over the variable effect, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed after the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it is suggested before the power supply is stopped. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power-on designation command, When the power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes and an operation in a predetermined mode. (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and establishment of acquisition conditions. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) as the hold storage, and the determination information, the player A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and an initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the effect, and the effect control means has an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) of the effect means, and the effect. It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. When it is possible to execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting a degree, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is used. The main control during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) capable of controlling a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and executing an effect according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and responds to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect can be executed, the predetermined signal is received. It is possible to output a notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is in progress. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in a non-waiting state (customer waiting state), and receive a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. If so, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and during the execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery) is performed from the main control means. When a designated command or the like) is received, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during the execution of the special game effect. When (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 14>
A conventional gaming machine generally includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the staging control means is continued is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine equipped with a staging control means (staging control board 130) capable of controlling, a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a staging image (variable staging, jackpot staging, etc.) is provided. The effect control means can display a game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the effect control means can display the game standby screen. If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display, it is possible to continue the display of the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 15>
A conventional gaming machine generally includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Some of such gaming machines execute abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not properly performed.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic) is provided. Abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, etc.) is provided. , Radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the control means and the detection means are connected for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.). The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. Notification etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. (Notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continues to execute error notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 16>
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the game effect is performed according to the result of the determination. The gaming machine to be executed is common. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example). , JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the staging control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. Yes, the first hold information (first hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the first hold storage, and the first hold information is additionally displayed in response to the decrease in the first hold storage. It is possible to shift and display each of the hold information to reduce it, and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, the first hold information is caused to perform an effect operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). It is possible, and the first hold information is in the temporary stop state of the plurality of effect symbols performing the effect operation, and the specific number (for example, three) is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the first hold storage is the predetermined number is received during the display of the first hold information. , The variation effect is started, and the first hold information (third hold icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first hold information is not shifted and displayed. The first hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is shifted and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means executes a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols on the front surface of the background image so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variation effect, the said It is possible to make the background image perform an effect operation (scrolling, change, etc.) when a plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped, and the plurality of effect symbols whose background image is performing the effect operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of the first hold information of a specific number (for example, three) which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the variation display in which the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number is started. When the time signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the first number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number. After displaying the hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first hold number indicating the number of the first hold storage in the first display area (sub first hold display 83), and the first hold memory corresponding to each of the first hold storage is possible. 1 Hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to cause a predetermined element (tactile image of a character, a symbol effect image) constituting the above to perform an effect operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and the plurality of effect symbols in which the predetermined element is performing the effect operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of the first hold information of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the start signal of the variation display in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When (a command for specifying the number of holds, a command for specifying a special symbol, a command for specifying a special figure variation pattern) is received, the execution of the variation effect is started, and the first hold, which is one less than the specific number in the first display area. The predetermined number of the first reserved numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the number (for example, two), and the number (for example, two) is one less than the specific number in the second display area. After displaying the first hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) It is characterized in that the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. Yes, it is possible to display the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the variable effect. It is possible to cause the first hold information to perform an effect operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) during the temporary stop, and the plurality of effect symbols on which the first hold information is performing the effect operation are temporarily stopped. At the start of the variation display in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number during the display of the specific number (for example, four) of the first hold information, which is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When a signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first hold of a number (for example, three) one less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed without displaying the information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means executes a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols on the front surface of the background image so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variation effect, the said It is possible to make the background image perform an effect operation (scrolling, change, etc.) when a plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped, and the plurality of effect symbols whose background image is performing the effect operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of the first hold information of a specific number (for example, four) which is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the variation display in which the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number is started. When the time signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the first number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number. The first hold information is displayed in a number two less than the specific number (for example, two) without displaying the hold information, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. .. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first hold number indicating the number of the first hold storage in the first display area (sub first hold display 83), and the first hold memory corresponding to each of the first hold storage is possible. 1 Hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to cause a predetermined element (tactile image of a character, a symbol effect image) constituting the above to perform an effect operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and the plurality of effect symbols in which the predetermined element is performing the effect operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of the first hold information of a specific number (for example, four) that is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the start signal of the variation display in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When (a hold number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first storage number (two less than the specific number in the first display area) ( The predetermined number of the first storage numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying (for example, two), and the number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area is displayed. 1 Number that is 2 less than the specified number without displaying the pending information The first hold information (for example, two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (staging control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variable display means that executes the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player are controlled. The effect control means includes a state control means, and the effect control means performs a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. It is possible to execute, and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, a predetermined element (tactile image of a character, a symbol effect image) constituting the effect symbol is produced (fluctuation operation). Etc.), and based on the determination result of the first determination information when the predetermined element is in the effect operation and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the variation effect is deviated from the stop position. When the start signal of the variation display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation effect. Display in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. Yes, the second hold information (second hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the second hold storage, and the second hold information is additionally displayed in accordance with the decrease in the hold storage. Is possible to shift display and decrease by one, and the second hold storage is displayed during the display of the second hold information of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When it receives the signal at the start of the variation display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), which is the predetermined number, the variation effect is started, and the second of the specific number. The second hold information (the icon display) corresponding to the predetermined number without shifting and displaying the second hold information (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the hold information. The 1st and 2nd hold icons from the area side) are shifted and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. Yes, the second hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each of the second hold storages can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and is specified by two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the number (for example, three) of the second hold information, the start signal of the variation display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern) in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command) is received, the variation effect is started, the second hold information is displayed in a number one less than the specific number (for example, two), and then the predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. The second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second hold storage in the first display area (sub-second hold display 84), and the second hold storage corresponding to each of the second hold storage is possible. 2 The hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and the specific number (for example, three) is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of the second hold information. The variation effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second storage numbers (for example, one) is not displayed in the first display area, which is one less than the specific number (for example, two). Is displayed, and in the second display area, a number (for example, two) of the second hold information that is one less than the specific number (for example, two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. indicate. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. Yes, it is possible to display the second hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each of the second hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), which is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1). During the display of the second hold information having a large number of specific numbers (for example, four), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one) is not displayed without displaying the second hold information which is one less than the specific number (for example, three). ) The second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. Yes, it is possible to display the second hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each of the second hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), which is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1). During the display of the second hold information having a large number of specific numbers (for example, four), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the second hold information, which is one less than the specific number (for example, three), is not displayed and is two more than the specific number. A small number (eg, two) of the second hold information is displayed, followed by a predetermined number (eg, one) of the second hold information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been performed. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second hold storage in the first display area (sub-second hold display 84), and the second hold storage corresponding to each of the second hold storage is possible. 2 The hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and the specific number (for example, four) that is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one) is said. When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of the second hold information. The variation effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second storage numbers (for example, one) is not displayed in the first display area, which is two less than the specific number (for example, two). Is displayed, and in the second display area, a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) without displaying the second hold information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three). The second hold information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variable display means that executes the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player are controlled. The effect control means includes a state control means, and the effect control means executes a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol in the specific gaming state so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the second determination information. This is possible, and when the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the variation effect is deviated from the stop position, the variation display start signal (holding number designation command, based on the determination result of the second determination information) When a special symbol designation command (special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation effect, and then the variation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display based on the determination result of the determination information. The hold information (hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the hold storage, and the hold information is shifted and displayed according to the decrease in the hold storage to execute one. It is possible to display it as (the icon), and while displaying a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved information which is 2 more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number. When the start signal of the variation display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the variation effect is started, and the specific number of the hold The required amount of the reserved information (first or second from the icon display area side) without shifting and displaying the reserved information (third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of information. The hold icon) is shifted and displayed, and one is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As the sixteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variation display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the hold information that is two more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. , Special figure variation pattern designation command) is deleted, the execution information is deleted, the variation effect is started, and the hold information is displayed in a number one less than the specific number (for example, two). Displays the predetermined number (for example, one) of the holding information and the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display, and is a hold indicating the number of hold storages. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, first special figure hold number display area 70E, second special figure hold number display area 70F). There, the hold information (hold icon) corresponding to each of the hold storages is displayed in the second display area (hold icon display area), and the hold information from which the variable display is started is used as the execution information (the icon). It is possible to display, and while displaying a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved information that is 2 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1), the start of the variable display in which the reserved storage becomes the predetermined number. When a time signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation effect is started, and the specified number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of the reserved numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the reserved number (for example, two), which is one less than the specified number (for example, one) in the second display area. After displaying the two) the reserved information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variation display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the hold information, which is three more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. , Special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the variation effect is started, and the hold information is displayed in a number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variation display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the hold information, which is three more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. , Special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the variation effect is started, and the hold information is displayed in a number one less than the specific number (for example, three). The reserved information is displayed in a number two less than the specific number (for example, two), and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as reserved storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variation display, and is a hold indicating the number of hold storages. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, first special figure hold number display area 70E, second special figure hold number display area 70F). There, the hold information (hold icon) corresponding to each of the hold storage is displayed in the second display area (hold icon display area), and the hold information from which the variable display is started is used as the execution information (the icon). It is possible to display, and during the display of the reserved information of a specific number (for example, 4) which is 3 more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), the start of the variable display in which the reserved storage becomes the predetermined number. When the time signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation effect is started, and the specified number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of the reserved numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the reserved number (for example, two) which is two less than the specified number, and the number is one less than the specific number (for example, one) in the second display area. The holding information is displayed in a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) without displaying the holding information (three), and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the holding information and the holding information are displayed. Display execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is a special game (big hit) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entry into the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game) and a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol so as to correspond to the display, and the variable display is started when the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the variable effect is deviated from the stop position. When a time signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation effect, and then the variation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the staging control means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 17>
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the gaming machine that executes the game effect according to the result of the determination. Is common. In such a gaming machine, there is also known to perform an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, a gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in gaming is low.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the game effect is more than the first effect (pre-reach effect). The vibration effect includes the specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed later, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (during dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect). , 1 second vibration effect such as development effect) and 2nd vibration effect different from the 1st vibration effect (3 seconds or more at cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, pattern alignment, etc.) In the specific game effect, the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect than during the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). The vibration effect includes a specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which a specific effect (reach effect) that expects the execution of the special game is executed after the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. Vibration effect (1 second vibration effect such as dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) and second vibration effect different from the first vibration effect (cut-in effect, In the specific game effect, the first vibration effect is executed as compared with the case where the first vibration effect is not executed. When this is done, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means includes a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed during the execution of the game effect, and the effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means, and the vibration effect corresponds to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (speech notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and the second vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation promotion display are included. In the predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a ends), the case where the second vibration effect is executed is better than the case where the suggestion effect is executed. Expectations for special games to be performed are high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variation game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state) and the effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a variable effect that displays a plurality of types of effect symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. ), And the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the variation effect, and the variation effect is performed by the first type of effect symbol (even symbol). The first specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the second specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed by the second type effect symbol (odd symbol other than "7"), and the third type effect symbol ("" 7 ”The pattern) includes the third specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (during dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect). 1 second vibration effect such as) and a second vibration effect different from the first vibration effect (3 seconds or more vibration effect such as cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, etc.). In the normal gaming state, the first specific variation effect is easier to execute than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is less likely to be executed than the first specific variation effect, and the first specific variation effect is It is easier to execute the second vibration effect when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means can execute a vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect. Yes, the vibration effect is accompanied by a first vibration effect (speech notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display sound effect of the operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is included, including the second vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation. , The effect sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button, the operation sound effect of the accessory) is output, but the predetermined effect sound is not output when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the game effect is a specific effect that is expected to execute the special game. The specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which (reach effect) is executed is included, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (line notice effect, which is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. A cut-in effect (cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation promotion display are included, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means. While the predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed when the second vibration effect is executed. In the specific game effect (big hit reach variation effect) in which the special game is executed, after the start of the specific effect, rather than the number of times the second vibration effect is executed (up to 3 times) before the start of the specific effect. The number of times the second vibration effect is executed (up to 7 times) in the above is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17), and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operation means during the execution of the game effect, and during the operation of the second operation means. When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame body composed of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The frame effect section (effect button 17 (button vibration motor), effect lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the frame and the acquisition conditions are satisfied (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and the effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means are provided, and the effect control means is executing the game effect. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (big hit notice effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation effect (vibration effect) that operates (operates, vibrates) the frame effect unit during the execution of the suggestion effect. , Motion effect, etc.), and the suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect (weak notice, pre-reach notice effect) and a second suggestion effect (strong) with a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect. The operation effect is more likely to be executed when the second suggestion effect is executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, including the advance notice and the post-reach advance notice effect. The expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect than when the operation effect is not executed during the execution of the effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operating means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means can be controlled into a first effect mode (effect modes A to C) and a second effect mode (effect modes D to G), and the game effect is being executed. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the vibration effect is a first vibration effect (cut-in effect at the time of a dialogue notice effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time, successful decision effect, etc.) and the second vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed without the operation promotion display. The degree of expectation that the special game is executed when the second vibration effect is executed differs between the effect mode and the second effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the effect control means can be controlled into a first effect mode (effect modes A to C) and a second effect mode (effect modes D to G), and the game effect is being executed. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the vibration effect is a first vibration effect (cut-in effect at the time of a dialogue notice effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time, successful decision effect, etc.) and the second vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed without the operation promotion display. The degree of expectation that the special game is executed when the first vibration effect is executed differs between the effect mode and the second effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame body composed of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The frame effect section (effect button 17 (button vibration motor), effect lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the frame and the acquisition conditions are satisfied (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and the effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means are provided, and the effect control means is executing the game effect. Executes a change effect (vibration effect, operation effect, light emission effect, etc.) that changes the frame effect unit from the first state (standby state, dimming state) to the second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state). It is possible, and the variation effect includes a specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the execution of the first effect. The expectation that the special game is executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed, and the specific game effect (big hit) in which the special game is executed. In the reach variation effect), the change effect is executed during the execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during the execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the dialogue notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, the development effect, the cut-in effect, etc.) and the operation promotion display are executed according to the above. The first vibration effect includes the second vibration effect (one of the vibration effects at the time of step-up notice effect, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned), and the first vibration effect has different expectations for the special game to be executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration production during dialogue notice production, pseudo-continuous production, or development production, weak vibration or strong vibration for 3 seconds for vibration production during cut-in production) It is executed by any of (vibration), and the second vibration effect is one vibration mode (at the time of step-up notice effect) that is predetermined when performing a predetermined effect (step-up notice effect, symbol alignment, C symbol alignment). If it is a vibration effect, it is executed with a weak vibration for 1 second, if it is a vibration effect when the symbols are aligned, it is executed with a strong vibration for 4 seconds, and when the C symbols are aligned, it is executed with a strong vibration for 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability change game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is provided with a game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a predetermined vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up notice). The predetermined vibration effect includes a 1-second vibration effect such as during an effect) and a specific vibration effect different from the predetermined vibration effect (3 seconds or more vibration effect such as when a successful decision is produced or when the symbols are aligned). , The first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect) executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display, and the second vibration effect (look-ahead vibration) executed without the operation promotion display. In the game effect in which the special game is executed, the first vibration effect is executed and the second vibration effect is performed, including one of the effect and the vibration effect at the time of the step-up notice effect). The ratio at which the specific vibration effect is executed after that is different depending on the case where the specific vibration effect is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the specific gaming state. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control for executing a variable effect for displaying a plurality of types of effect symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means includes means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means includes a special effect (decision success effect, final effect, etc.) suggesting execution of the special game during the execution of the variable effect, and the operation means. Vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, final effect Time, when the symbols are aligned, vibration effect such as when the C symbols are aligned), and when the variable effect in which the special game is executed is executed, the type of effect symbol suggesting the execution of the special game ( The execution mode (whether or not execution, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect differs depending on the even symbol, the odd symbol other than "7", and the "7" symbol), and the vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the special effect. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the type of effect symbol that suggests the execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17), and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the operation promotion display is included in the vibration effect. The first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of dialogue notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the first operation means, and the operation promotion display are not performed. The first vibration effect includes the second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect, etc.), and the start timing of vibration differs depending on the operation timing of the first operating means, and the first vibration effect is performed. In the two vibration effect, the start timing of the vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is played through the second operating means. It is designed to be communicated to people. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (speech notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development). During the second valid period, including the valid period related to the production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.) and the second valid period (valid period while waiting for customers) different from the first valid period. The vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the first effective period than when the operating means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operating means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and an effect control means (effect control board) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means is a first effective period (effective period related to a dialogue notice effect, etc.). And a second valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) different from the first valid period, and a third valid period (waiting for customers) different from the first valid period and the second valid period. The vibration effect is executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period than when the operating means is operated during the third valid period. It is easy to do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a staging unit (staging button 17 (button vibration motor) that can be operated in a predetermined manner in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. , Staging lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ) Is acquired (main control board 110), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (main control board 110), and a determination result of the determination means. A staging control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) is provided, and the effect control means includes a first effect mode (effect modes A to C) and a second effect mode (effect mode D). It can be controlled to (G), and the effect unit is changed from the first state (standby state, extinguished state) to the second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state) during the execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a change effect (vibration effect, motion effect, light emission effect, etc.), and it is expected that the special game will be executed when the change effect is executed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The degree is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and the effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means has a first effect mode (effect). Modes A to C) and second effect modes (effect modes D to G) can be controlled, and up to one of a plurality of stages having different expectations for the special game to be executed during the execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute the progressing stage effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect), and in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the stage effect is a predetermined stage (if it is a step-up advance notice effect, the first effect). The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when any of the three-step effect, the fourth step effect, and the fifth step effect progresses to once or twice in the case of a pseudo-continuous effect is different. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means has a first effect mode (effect). Modes A to C) and second effect modes (effect modes D to G) can be controlled, and a continuous effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead) in which a notice effect is performed by one or more of the game effects is performed. Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and a specific effect (reach effect) that is expected to execute the special game can be executed in the game effect, and a predetermined number of times (once) can be executed in the first effect mode. In the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect, the specific effect is performed when the continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times in the second effect mode, as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed. Is hard to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means has a first effect mode (effect). Modes A to C) and second effect modes (effect modes D to G) can be controlled, and a continuous effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead) in which a notice effect is performed by one or more of the game effects is performed. Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and a specific effect (reach effect) that is expected to execute the special game can be executed in the game effect, and a predetermined number of times (twice or) can be executed in the second effect mode. In the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect, the case where the continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times in the first effect mode is better than the case where the continuous effect (3 times) is executed. The specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball, and determination means (main) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means has a first effect mode (effect). Modes A to C) and second effect modes (effect modes D to G) can be controlled, and a continuous effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead) in which a notice effect is performed by one or more of the game effects is performed. Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and a specific effect (reach effect) that expects the special game to be executed can be executed in the game effect. In the specific effect, the first specific effect (normal reach) can be executed. The first effect mode includes the effect) and the second specific effect (SP / SPSP reach effect), which is more expected to execute the special game than the first specific effect. In the case where the first continuous effect is executed, the specific effect is more likely to be executed in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect, and the second effect mode is higher than the first effect mode. In the effect mode, when the second continuous effect is executed more than the first number, the second specific effect is more likely to be executed in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player. Judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the display means (image display device) capable of displaying the effect image and the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). The acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the image, the determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the game according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the effect (variable effect) is provided, and the effect control means is an operation promotion display (opaque button image) for prompting the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game effect. ), And the operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) can be executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation promotion display is displayed on the display means before the operation promotion display is performed. It is possible to display a suggestion (semi-transparent button image) suggesting that it may be performed, and the operation promotion display includes a first operation promotion display (white button image in a normal state) and the above. The first operation promotion display includes a second operation promotion display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, and a rainbow button image in a protruding state) having different expectations for executing the special game. The degree of expectation that the special game is executed when the first operation promotion display is performed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the suggestion display is not performed in the first effect mode. The expectation that the special game will be executed is higher in the case where the operation promotion display is performed after the suggestion display is performed than in the case where the operation promotion display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Is to shift to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game, but it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the jackpot games.

In addition, if the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after the end of all jackpot games and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the normal game state is normally executed. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

Further, when the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game, the gaming machine may be used to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General gate 45 1st start port 47 2nd start port 50 Grand prize opening 70 1st image display device 71 2nd image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Staging control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can perform special games that are advantageous to the player
An operation unit that can vibrate in a predetermined mode,
Acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information,
The effect control means for executing the game effect according to the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The staging control means
It is possible to control the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
During the execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the operation unit from the non-vibration state to the vibrating state without performing the operation valid period and the operation promotion display .
The degree of expectation that the special game is executed when the change effect is executed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
For the change effect,
The first change effect executed at a predetermined timing and
The second change effect, which is executed at a timing different from that of the first change effect, is included.
It is possible to make the vibration mode in the first change effect different from the vibration mode in the second change effect, and to produce the first change effect and the second change effect during the execution of the game effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed so that the periods do not overlap .

Images